2stress Manual

M. W.
KELLOGG LIMITED PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS
TABLE OF CONTENTS AND REVISION HISTORY
SECTION TITLE PAGE

NUMBER NUMBER
1 Introduction
2 General Working Methods 4
3 Engineering Deliverables 9
4 Specific Working Methods 10
5 Recording and Transmittal of Data 25
6 Checking Procedure 30
7 Computer Programs 35
8 Electronic Transfer of Information 35
9 Core Activities Procedure 36
10 Standard Forms and Calculation Sheets 36
11 Standard Details and Information 37
12 Standard Allowable Loads 40
13 Specific details and calculations 42
13.0 Calculation Methods and Categories 42
13.1 Equipment 54
13.2 Vertical Vessels 56
13.3 Horizontal Vessels 68
13.4 Storage Tanks 71
13.5 Shell & Tube Exchangers
13.6 Air Cooled Exhangers
13.7 Plate Fin Exchangers
13.8 Cold Boxes
13.9 Cooling Towers
13.10 Centrifugal Compressors
13.11 Reciprocating Compressors
13.12 Turbines
13.13 Blowers
13.14 Centrifugal Pumps 75
13.15 Gear Pumps 92
13.16 Pumps – (General) 93
13.17 Wind 105
13.18 Vibration 108
13.19 Earthquake 120
13.20 Settlement 121
13.21 Underground Piping 128
13.22 Large Diameter Pipe 135
13.23 Orifice Design 142
13.24 Manual Flexibility Calculation 151
13.25 Relief Valve Piping Systems/ Reaction Loads 153
13.26 Supports 178
13.27 Trunnion Design 236
13.28 Cold Supports 249
13.29 Slide Plates 250
1
M. W. KELLOGG LIMITED PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1.0 SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1.1 This instruction defines the responsibilities and general policies and practices of the
Piping Stress Engineers.
1.1.2 This instruction does not cover the technical aspects of pipe stressing. It is primarily
intended for use by the Lead Stress engineer to ensure a cohesive approach to the
subject.
1.1.3 This instruction is a general one covering most circumstances, but may be deviated
from, if overruled by specific job requirements with the expressed agreement of the
Chief Piping Engineer.
1.2.0 ASSOCIATED INSTRUCTIONS AND DESIGN GUIDES
Section 11 Initial Information Required for a Project
Section 13.26 Pipe Supports.
Section 13.0 Piping Stress Critical Line List
Sections 13.1 Design Guide for Equipment and Nozzle Loadings.

to 13.16
Section 6 Engineering Check of Drawings, Specifications, Schedules &

Calculations
Section 7 Control of Computer Programs
1.3.0 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Lead Stress Engineer
Responsible to the Lead Piping Engineer of a Project for the supervision and control of
Stress operations.
1.3.2 Critical Line List
In this instruction, the Critical Line List refers to the line list with piping stress criticality
shown
2
1.4.0 GENERAL PHILOSOPHY

The basic responsibility of the Stress Engineers is to ensure that piping is routed and
supported so that no damage occurs to either the pipe or associated equipment due to
the effects of thermal expansion or contraction, or loads resulting from weight, pressure,
wind, earthquake, pulsation, shock, foundation settlement, etc.
Piping systems shall have adequate flexibility and wherever possible it shall be
achieved by natural flexibility of the pipe work. Piping connected to sensitive equipment
shall meet all applicable allowable.
The purpose of these guidelines is to ensure the sound and uniform approach to the
review of the mechanical safety of the piping and related systems and to be able to
produce evidence that this has been done satisfactorily.
Whilst a suitably high standard of work must be achieved it is essential that the Lead
Stress Engineer ensures that the time taken to review piping systems, etc is not
extended by unnecessary or over-detailed work. To aid in this endeavour, the following
points should be followed:-
a. Only enter essential results / data on stress sketches. Extraneous information not
only wastes time but may confuse the issue.
b. Identify worst operation cases before running computer checks, then run these cases
only. It should be noted that, although the cost and input time required to input
alternative cases may be low, it is time consuming to review and transpose the
output data.
c. If a "Worst case" is not immediately obvious, run all the necessary cases. These are
the extreme cases chosen after a visual/manual review of the system. Notes should
be given saying that these are the worst load/stress conditions and the other
conditions that were reviewed.
d. Review all configurations using visual/approximate methods prior to computer
calculations so the configurations with obvious problems may be discussed with the
piping designers prior to setting up the computer run.
e. Inform piping design of any configurations that have been passed but have loads or
stresses that are close to the allowable values, and "freeze" the arrangement.
f. Keep the designs realistic : Minimise the use of "super" special supports requiring
high tolerances or complex designs. If these are required it tends to indicate that a
re-route is necessary.
g. Wherever possible, avoid the use of flexible connectors (bellows, etc). The use of
springs should also be kept to a minimum.
h. The use of "cold spring" should be kept to a minimum.
i. Where max. operating or design temperatures appear high by comparison with other
available data, discuss it with the systems engineer prior to calculation of the system,
highlighting the impact on the piping/equipment if the temperature proves inaccurate.
3
2.0 GENERAL WORKING METHODS
(This section shall be read in conjunction with Flow Chart of Work Processes shown in
Piping Stress Desk Manual 3-1-09 Section 1.3)
2.1.0 Initial Review
2.1.1 At a very early stage in a project, the Lead Piping Engineer will consult the Lead Stress
Engineer concerning all preliminary piping arrangements around sensitive equipment
and in other areas considered as potential critical areas.
2.1.2 At this time, definitive calculations will not normally be conducted by the Stress
Engineer, but he will, using appropriate approximate methods give general acceptance
to the proposed routings, with comments, where extra flexibility is required or
Special/Structural support requirements are envisaged.
2.1.3 The method of data transmission will normally be by the use of rough stress sketches,
general arrangement drawings, or CAD print. This will then be copied and returned with
appropriate comments by the Stress engineer with "Preliminary" stamped on it.
2.1.4 The Lead Stress Engineer will also review all applicable project standards, and will
check the wall thicknesses and branch reinforcement tables in the Piping Materials
Specification using the wall thickness excel spread calculation program or similar quick
methods.
2.1.5 The Lead Stress Engineer will also establish as much as possible the base data as
noted in section 11. He will also review the allowable equipment loads with the
appropriate Equipment Engineers and obtain Client agreement on any factors used in
allowable nozzle loadings.
2.1.6 As soon as possible the Lead Stress Engineer will create the initial Critical Line List.
2.1.7 Long pipe runs such as pipe racks and pipe tracks will be reviewed to establish
proposed loop locations and sizes as well as anchor locations and loads. This
information is to be transmitted to Civil Group with details of supporting philosophy.
Intermediate piperack supporting steel philosophy for small bore lines is to be
established and requested.
2.1.8 Concrete piperacks / structures require insert plates cast into them for supporting
purposes. The Lead Stress Engineer in conjunction with the Design team should
establish philosophy for location / loadings of these plates.
4
2.2.0 Detailed Stress Review
Detailed Stress Review is sequenced as an operation predominantly within the Planning phase,
see flowchart in Piping Stress Analysis Desk Manual 3.1.9 section 1.4.
2.2.1 After the issue of the Critical Line List, the Piping Designers will start to issue definitive
stress sketches from those areas that they have designed or partly designed extracted
from the 3D CAD Model wherever possible. In parallel with this, Caesar II neutral files
corresponding to the stress sketches will be extracted using the appropriate CAD
interface program.
2.2.2 These stress sketches will then be passed out to the Lead Stress Engineer, together
with the location/names of the Caesar II neutral files.
2.2.3 These stress sketches form the start point for detailed calculations for each piping
system and usually form the start point for Caesar II models.
2.2.4 At the discretion of the Lead Stress Engineer (in some cases at the request of the Lead
Piping Engineer) some pipes relating to a number of different systems, but grouped
together in one area, may be reviewed using General Arrangement Drawings. A notable
example of this is pipe racks.
2.2.5 The Lead Stress Engineer shall arrange for all Stress personnel to be familiarised with
the procedure for extracting stress sketch type isometrics from the 3D system. If the
Stress Engineer then deems it necessary to manipulate the way the isometrics are
presented and produce a system stress sketch, this can be achieved. Stress Engineers
should extract these PDS/PDMS generated stress isometrics on a dedicated design
terminal as required. The Designer shall be consulted to ascertain any queries
regarding Status of modelling.
2.2.6 The method of assessing pipes will come under one of three categories :
a. Computer. In this case the piping system will be modeled and calculated using
the Piping Stress Computer program. (Usually Caesar II)
b. Approximate. In this case hand calculation techniques or simplified computer
programs are used to prove the acceptability of the system. They may
also be approved by comparison with similar systems.
c. Visual. In this case simple techniques of approximate "guided cantilever" type
or by background knowledge/experience are used to approve the
system with minimal calculations.
5
2.2.7 Whilst the approval method is ultimately the responsibility of the individual Stress
Engineer to be approved by the checker, the basic split of calculation types is as
Section 13.0
This should be used as a guide only, and for any special piping (e.g. lined pipe)
computer calculations should always be considered.
2.2.8 For all calculations, the combination of conditions that could theoretically occur so as to
produce the maximum stress and equipment loading should be considered. This
consideration should include but not be restricted to the following areas (See also
Section 4):
a. Thermal expansion due to :
Design Temperature
Steam out.
Steam or electrical tracing.
Any Purging / Decoking.
Atmospheric and Solar Temperatures.
b. Movement of pipe's attachments due to:
Vessel or equipment thermal growth and Tank bulge.
Column or other vessel or equipment Sway.
Structural sway.
Settlement.
c. Wind, snow or other environmental loadings.
d. Dead weight and pressure loadings.
e. Vibration caused by:
Earthquake.
"Water hammer" / sudden valve opening or closing / Pulsating flow / Slug flow.
Mechanically induced vibration from compressors or other equipment.
Vortex Shedding.
2.2.9 After review, the Stress Engineer indicates any additional supporting or guiding required
and locates any anchors or line stops required. He also discusses any re-routing he
may require with the Lead Piping Engineer and/or the designer who produced the
original design. If the routing is not acceptable alternatives are discussed with
appropriate back-up calculations, until an acceptable arrangement to all parties is
found.
2.2.10 The signed off Stress Sketch is returned to the Piping Designer for incorporation. If
appropriate, copies of the Stress sketch together with the Stress Data Sheet showing
imposed loadings is passed to the Equipment group and / or the Civil / Structural group.
2.2.11 On completion of a Construction Area by Stress an extracted Final Planning Study
marked up by the Stress team with appropriate loads shall be produced. This will be
passed to Civil / Structural Groups and a copy passed to the Design team.
6
2.3 Final Approval
Final approval is sequenced as an operation within the Phase 2 (Detailed Design)

flowchart engineering check list, attachment 1 of this document and checking
procedures in section 6.
2.3.1 Checking
Prior to receipt of the isometrics for final approval the stress calculations shall be
checked by Stress in accordance with criteria in section 6.0.
The isometrics should be checked in accordance with the Isometric Production
Schedule.
2.3.2 Isometrics.
After an isometric has been through all phases of isometric production, the Construction
Release print will be passed via the Lead Stress Engineer to the applicable Stress
Engineer for signature. At this stage it should only be necessary to review the isometric
against the stress sketch to ensure that there have been no significant changes prior to
signing the drawing.
2.3.3 If there is a significant change, the Stress Engineer should check to see if it significantly
affects the calculation. If it does not, he takes a copy of the Isometrics and makes
appropriate notes on it to the affect that it is still acceptable, and files it with the original
calculation. If there is a problem, he will then treat the Isometric copy as a stress sketch
and perform a complete analysis on it with appropriate checking prior to revising the line
routing/supporting or signing off the isometric.
2.3.4 Pipe Support Study Drawings.
The Stress Engineers are responsible for reviewing the final isometrics against the
Extracted Planning Study that was issued to Civils / Structural group for loads and pipe
support types. If there are changes the Stress Engineer will assess the magnitude of
the change and where necessary advise Civils / Structural Dept of any changed /
relocated / new pipe support requirements via IOC (see section 5 paragraph 8.0). The
planning study shall be marked up with any changes / IOC reference numbers. On
completion of the issue of isometrics from a construction area the Study Drawings shall
be signed as checked by the Stress Engineer.
7
Attachment 1
Contract: Calculation No
Client:
Project:
Discipline
ENGINEERING CHECKLIST
Are the following items included and checked Originator Checker
1. Pipe data complies with latest P&ID information
2. Route complies with latest study/PGA/CAD Model /Isometric
3. Material Specification, pipe data and branch Reinforcement .
4. Pipe design data is latest information Design Temperature
Design Pressure
Upset Temperature & Pressure
Steamout / De-coke etc.
Slugging (2 Phase Flow)
Operating/ Maintenance Procedures
5 Design cases established for analysis are “Worst Cases “.
6 Has Wind case been considered?
7 Has Earthquake been considered?
8 Has Pipe Bowing been considered ?
9 Has fire case been considered?
10 Has occasional weight case been considered?
11 Has Hydro case been Considered?
12 Has dynamic load from equipment been considered?
13 Has PSV/disc operation been considered?
14 Has settlement been considered?
15 Has steamout / Decoke been considered?
17 Has regeneration been considered?
18 Has steam tracing been considered?
19 Have springs been specified using correct loads i.e. latest vendor information?
20 Are stresses in accordance with ASME B31.3?
21 Equipment Information : Nozzle displacements
Fixed end/support positions
Allowable loading information available
22 Are pipe support locations and type shown on Stress Isometric and on Planning Study?
23 Has friction on supports been considered?
24 Has major support information been transmitted to Structural/ Civil Dept/and Vessels Dept
25 Have assumptions made been noted in analysis / on Stress Sketch?
26 Analysis complies with Stress Procedure
27 Terminal forces in analysis are less or equal to allowables.
28 Has any additional reinforcing at tees and trunnions been shown on stress sketch?
29 Documentation For Stress Report
System Description (Stress/ Flexibility Sketch FS-B- )
Calculations: Nozzle Flexibility Calc included
Reactive Loads Calculations included
Slugging Loads calculations included
Flange leakage calculations included
Flexibility calculations (hand and computer)
Branch reinforcement calculations for pressure
containment included
Equipment Loading Data / Sheets Vessels
Exchangers
Pumps
Compressors (NEMA check)
Computer Printout : Cases/ Title
Input
Restraint Summary
Max Stresses, Sustained Deflections
Springs, Snubber data etc.
SIGNED: DATE: Sign Sign
8
3.0 ENGINEERING DELIVERABLES
Engineering documentation for pipe stress analysis shall include the following:-
Documentation for Category 1, 2 and 3 systems

(As defined in section 13.0)
For Stress Report
(Document numbering to be as required for project. Also see GreenerQ Standard Numbering Codes)
a) Completed Front sheet As set up for project.
b) System Description (Flexibility / Stress Sketch FS-B- )
c) Cases (Flexibility Data Sheet FDS-B- )
d) Calculations: Nozzle Flexibility Calc included
(RV / Control Valve reactions etc.)
Branch reinforcement calculations for
pressure containment included
d) Equipment Loading Data / Vessels

Sheets Exchangers
Pumps (API 610 check)
e) Computer Printout : Completed title page describing outline of

design runs and conditions for Caesar II.
Input Data
Restraint Summary
Max Stresses
Sustained Deflections
Springs and Snubber data etc.
Documentation for Category 4 systems

(As defined in section 13.0)
For Stress Report
(Document numbering to be as required for project. Also see GreenerQ Standard Numbering Codes)
Approximate Hand or Computer pipe stress calculations and sketches as
appropriate.
9
4.0 SPECIFIC WORKING METHODS
This section addresses various specific topics within the scope of Piping Stress
Engineering without any reference to any specific project. Hence they are
recommendations that should be tempered by the necessities of the specific project
concerned and good engineering judgement.
4.1 Thermal Loads and Stress Considerations
4.1.1 Elastic Modulus
Thermal loads should be calculated using the elastic modulus at the ‘as installed’
temperature for hot lines, and the minimum temperature for cold lines. At elevated
temperatures where thermal loading is high credit may be taken for the hot modulus in
accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3.
Thermal stresses should be calculated using the elastic modulus at 70°F (21.1°C) for
all hot lines and the elastic modulus at the minimum temperature for cold lines.
Hot lines are those primarily subject to thermal expansion, and cold lines are those
primarily subject to thermal contraction.
4.1.2 Flexibility Temperatures
The temperatures to be considered in thermal analysis are:
a) Design Temperature.
This temperature is quoted in the line designation tables and is the maximum or
minimum temperature that the line is considered to see under operating conditions.
b) Normal Operating Temperature.
This temperature is quoted in the line designation tables and is the temperature that
the line is considered to see during normal operation.
Generally this temperature is not considered unless adjacent pipe or equipment

have higher differential operating temperatures than design temperatures.
c) Installation Temperatures.
The installation temperature is used for evaluating load cases. The stress Engineer
is responsible for determining the worst case scenario for the load case ie cold
condition or hot condition.
The installation temperature has no effect on thermal stresses which must be
evaluated over the full stress range. (ie from the most negative cold design temp to
the most positive hot design temp).
10
d) Solar Temperature.
This temperature is the theoretical maximum temperature, that an uninsulated
empty pipe can attain when subject to direct sunlight with no wind. This
temperatures is to be considered when calculating line stress ranges / movements /
nozzle displacements and must be considered for applied loads if higher than the
Design temperature. Typical maximum for desert regions is 85 o C. Check project
specifications for maximum values.
e) Steam out.
Steam-out temperatures and the lines which will be steamed out should be
established with the Facilities Engineering group at the beginning of the project.
Steam out temperatures will be considered for flexibility analysis if in excess of
design conditions. As this event is of short term duration:
Allowable Sustained Stress may be increased by 1.33 times as per ANSI B31.3
section 302.2.4.
It should also be considered that loads on equipment for this condition may be
increased by up to 2 times for short term duration. However, this should be
confirmed with the equipment manufacturer as soon as possible.
Consideration should also be given to whether equipment and piping are steamed
out together or separately and whether it is possible for entire pieces of equipment
to attain full steamout temperature throughout.
f) Steam tracing.
Steam tracing temperature should be used for flexibility calculations if it is greater

than the design temperature. (Electrically traced lines should be calculated using
their design temperature.)
g) Regeneration
This condition should be considered carefully and accurate values for temperature,
frequency and duration of the process obtained. The allowable stress range may
have to be reduced as per table 302.3.5 of ASME B31.3 to avoid fatigue failure.
h) Decoke
This extreme condition that is of short duration. It will be considered for flexibility
analysis, but the allowable Sustained Stress may be increased by 1.33 times (as
per ANSI B31.3 section 302.2.4).
i) Fire
Temperatures produced by fire are a special consideration. For this case the design
considered should be that the system may be over-strained, but it must not fail
under fire conditions. The principal is that after a fire all affected piping would be
replaced.
11
i) Internally Lined Pipe.
For concrete lined pipe for water lines, the expansion temperature to be used is the
Solar temperature, or if the line is buried or externally insulated the line will be at
ambient condition.
For Refractory lined pipe, the metal temperature will be significantly less than the
commodity temperature. An accurate skin temperature should be obtained from the
Facilities Engineering group.
k) Pipe Bowing
Where there is seen to be a differential temperature around the circumference of a

pipe, , then the effect of pipe bowing should be considered. Examples of this are:
Where a flare line is subject to radiant heat on the top of it, and where an LNG line
is at start-up when the lower half of the pipe is cooled before the line fills and cools
the top half of the pipe
Temperature differentials should be obtained from the process engineers, but as a

first estimate, the differential temperature for LNG can be considered as 30°C.
Hold down type supports may be specified on piping systems to control bowing /
stresses / deflections. On LNG lines hold down supports shall be specified in order
to prevent damage to the cold insulation during bowing. Consideration should be
given to extending the lengths of linestops / guides to prevent shoes lifting out of
supports during bowing in a piping system.
12
4.2 Sustained Loads and Stress Considerations

4.2.1 Design Pressure
This Pressure is quoted in the line designation tables and is the maximum temperature
that the line is considered to see under operating conditions.
4.2.2 Bourdon Tube Effect
This is the stiffening effect at the elbows caused by the internal pressure tending to
straighten the pipe out. It is most noticeable, and should be particularly considered in
thin walled large diameter pipe.
This effect should not be considered in cold lines where the pipe is contracting as it aids
the contraction of the pipe and is hence a less conservative assumption.
4.2.3 Operating Pressure
This pressure is not normally significant for piping stress.
4.2.4 Hydrotest / Pneumatic Test
Project Specifications / Guidelines will generally specify certain systems as not being
subject to a hydrostatic test. ie they will be pneumatically tested. It is the responsibility
of the Lead Stress Engineer in conjunction with the Lead Piping Engineer to ensure
these systems are defined at an early stage and that the Client does not reserve the
right to Hydrotest these systems in future (for example after maintenance operations).
The support system should be strong enough to support the pipe when it is being
hydrotested. Temporary supports are to be avoided but if specified Client agreement
may be required.
If the pipe cannot be supported or if it will cause load problems on the structural steel,
then a pneumatic test may be considered. Safety exclusion zones will require
consideration for any pneumatic test
The piping wall should be sufficiently thick to resist hydrotest or air test without yielding.
Cryogenic piping should not normally be hydrotested unless a sufficiently stringent
drying procedure is incorporated. (All moisture must be removed from the line
otherwise freezing of liquid will occur in the line under operating conditions).
If stainless steel or metal bellows expansion units have been used, then hydrotesting
should not be carried out because the bellows corrugations cannot be adequately
drained after testing. Pneumatic testing will have to be considered for lines including
metal bellows.
13
4.2.5 Vacuum Design
Lines subject to vacuum or sub-sea lines with a resultant external pressure should be
checked to ASME section VIII Div. 1 section UG-28 ("Thickness of Shells and Tubes
under external pressure")
4.2.6 Operating Weight
Operating weight is the weight of the pipe with all insulation, components and
commodity included, and all items permanently attached to it.
4.2.7 Occasional Weight
This is an added weight that occurs occasionally such as snow, ice etc.
In addition the affects of traffic on buried pipelines should be considered.
(See Section 13.25).
14
4.3 Dynamic and Other Loads and Stress Considerations
4.3.1 Seismic
In the absence of project specific information use Section 13.23 to model seismically
generated dynamic loads as equivalent laterally imposed static loads. Vertical
excitation will also be considered. Earthquake analysis criteria must be clearly defined
ie some systems could be subject to Maximum Credible Earthquake while others the
Obligatory Base Case. A Dynamic response spectrum analysis should only be
considered if required by the project or if a piece of equipment or piping arrangement
appears unusually sensitive to vibration. (Also see Section 13.23).
4.3.2 Dynamic loads from equipment. (Also see Sections 13.22 and 13.11)
Some equipment, noticeably reciprocating compressors and pumps generate liquid
pulsations causing vibration. To minimise this problem fluid damping bottle should be
designed into the system, and the stress engineer should ensure that the fundamental
frequencies of the system is not a multiple of the operating speed of the equipment.
4.3.3 Wind : See Section 13.21 for load calculations

All piping shall be restrained in accordance with good engineering practice with due
regard to wind pressure (See Section 13.30.7). Wind pressure can be applied in any
direction and the most unfavourable conditions shall be considered.
4.3.4 Reaction at Pressure Relief Valve Discharge points. See Section 13.29.
4.3.5 Slug Flow and Valve opening / closure
Slug flow is the condition of a bolus of liquid flowing along a pipe. A similar effect can
occur when a valve is suddenly shut off or opened and a shock wave passes down the
pipe ("Waterhammer").
The impact of a slug or the wave front of liquid from an opening valve onto an elbow
can be excessive, so that this condition should be kept to a minimum by using
alternative designs if possible.
The static force on a 90° Elbow due to slug flow impinges at 45° to the direction of flow
into the elbow radially outwards from the elbow. The load including a dynamic impact
factor of 2 :
F = 2 x ρ x A x V2 / g (in consistent units)

F
Where
F = Force,
ρ = Density of fluid
A = Pipe internal area
V = Fluid Velocity
g = gravitational constant
4.3.6 Settlement
Loads and stresses caused by differential settlement between different supports and
equipment should always be considered. The first support from the nozzle on rotating
equipment should always be on the same foundation as the equipment. For
15
maintenance / alignment reasons supports local to rotating equipment should be

adjustable supports. The use of flexible piping and / or springs can be considered to
overcome settlement problems however careful consideration must be given to the lines
being emptied or standby – i.e. limit stops may be required on springs. Also see Section
13.24.
4.3.7 Tees
In order to ensure minimum stress concentrations at Welding Tee’s (type 3 in Caesar)
as defined in ASME B31.3 Appendix D. Tee’s shall be manufactured to ASME B16.9
with the following additional geometric restrictions as per B31.3 Appendix D :
Rx ≥ 1/8Db Where: Rx = Crotch Radius (see para 304.3.4(c))
Db = Outside Diameter of branch
Tc ≥ 1.5 T Tc = Crotch Thickness
T = Nominal Thickness of Matching Pipe
Extruded welded tees (type 6 in Caesar) shall be manufactured in accordance with the
restrictions in ASME B31.3 Appendix D i.e.:
Rx ≥ 0.05Db
Tc < 1.5T
These requirements must be fully specified from the outset in all bids / requisitions. All
suppliers must be fully aware of the requirements. Confirmation of design thickness /
radius shall be obtained and tees modelled accordingly for stress analysis. There will
most probably be a split from type 3 to type 6 as the size increases.
4.3.8 45o lateral branch connections
Stress intensification factors to be 2 x SIF factors for 90 o stub-in.
4.3.9 Friction
Loads on supports, anchors, guides, line stops and equipment nozzles should always
consider friction effects.
Friction effects can never be used to reduce applied loads, i.e. model alternatives
without friction must be analysed for systems subject to wind or seismic loads because
the “guiding” support effects at plain resting supports will be lost due to any vibration
induced. Model alternatives with friction will have to be run to check the overall stress
range and thermal nozzle loads.
Typical minimum friction coefficients:
Steel to Steel = 0.3

Polished Stainless Steel to PTFE = 0.1
Project specifications may require higher values.
4.3.10 Vessels, Columns and Drums
Typically vessel nozzle load limits will be agreed at the beginning of a job with the
Vessels group and the agreed limits will be imposed on vessel vendors.
16
For other information regarding vessel bracket loading and expansion calculations, see
Section 13.2 for vertical vessels and Section 13.3 for horizontal vessels.
17
4.4 Load Combinations
4.4.1 Load Summary:
Loads and stresses Caused by expansion due to:

1a) Design Temperature.
1b) Normal Operating Temperature.
1c) Solar / Ambient Temperatures (Depending on Insulation).
1d) Steam out.
1e) Steam tracing.
1f) Regeneration
1g) Decoke
4.4.1 continued:-
1h) Pipe Bowing

1i) Fire
1j) Equipment Expansion
Let 1x) = Maximum of 1a), 1c), 1e)

1y) = Maximum of 1d), 1f), 1g)
Sustained Loads and Stresses due to:
2a) Design Pressure

2b) Hydrotest / Pneumatic Test
2c) Vacuum Design
2d) Operating Weight
2e) Occasional Weight
2f) Hydrotest Load
Dynamic and Other Loads and Stresses:
3a) Seismic
3b) Dynamic loads from equipment.
3c) Wind
3d) PSV and Rupture Disc Reaction
3e) Slug Flow and Valve opening/closure
3f) Settlement
4.4.2 Equipment Loads (see section 13.1)
4.4.3 Pipe Stress
Maximum Allowable Stress combinations that should be considered are the maximum
Displacement Stress Range, Sustained Stress and Occasional Stress. A table of base
case scenarios is shown in Table 1, these are to be checked and if necessary
manipulated to ensure they cover all design cases for lines. (from numbers in 4.4.1):
18
Table 1
Stress combinations to be considered acting on equipment Nozzles.

Load: \ Case: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stress Type: R = Displacement Stress Range R S S O O O R Y F
S = Sustained Stress
O = Occasional Stress
Y = Yield Stress
F = 2.5 x Allow (Not > UTS)
1x) Maximum Design expansion x
1y) Maximum Occasional Expansion x
1h) Pipe Bowing x x
1i) Fire x
1j) Equipment Expansion x x x
2a)/(2c) Design Pressure or Vacuum design x x x x x
2b) Test Pressure x
2d) Operating Weight x x x x x
2e) Occasional Weight x x x
2f) Hydrotest Weight x
3a) Seismic Load x
3b) Dynamic Load from Equipment x x
3c) Wind x
3d) PSV or Rupture Disc Reaction x
3e) Slug Flow etc. x
3f) Settlement x x x x x
The above table is to be used as a guide for the formulation of case runs.
19
4.5 Rotating Equipment

4.5.1 Pumps (Also see Section 13.14)
a) The Lead Stress Engineer must liase with the client and review job specifications
on each project to ascertain the philosophy regarding types of pumps and their
allowable nozzle loads.
b) Generally it is recommended to use API 610 type pumps wherever possible.
c) Where pump nozzle loads are expected to be high ask for heavy pump base plates
to increase the allowable pump nozzle loads (As per API 610.)
d) The placement of anchors immediately adjacent to pump nozzles should be
avoided. The net result of this practice is to shut in loads on the nozzle caused by
the expansion of the pump casing.
e) A full investigation of all possible operating configurations of a set of two or more
pumps should be conducted before the worst case or cases are analysed.
f) The first support from the pump nozzle shall be of an adjustable type to assist with
flange alignment and shall be located on the equipment foundation.
4.5.2 Compressors and Turbines (Also see sections 13.10 to 13.13).
a) Generally, the allowable loads on these pieces of equipment are governed by a
multiple of the loads quoted in NEMA SM 23, (now part of API-617).
Typically the NEMA factor of multiplying factor is not less than 2 and often factors
higher than this are used, typically 3 with a maximum up to around 6. This factor
should be established with the vendor at the earliest opportunity.
b) Compressors generally have many stages of compression, it is imperative to obtain
from the compressor vendors tabulated values of line temperatures and nozzle
movements for the many operating / upset conditions that occur. It is not possible
to analyse a multi stage compressor with numerous operating conditions without
this information. Process Department / Mechanical Equipment Groups are to be
involved in all discussions relating to this subject. All calculations associated with
compressors / turbines will generally be subject to close Client scrutiny and an up-
front analysis approach must be agreed ie (cases to be analysed / Multiples of
NEMA to be used for operating and design cases).
c) Various pressure drop / surge type analysis will be required on the machine, any
change in routing for flexibility or reducer positioning should be immediately advised
to Process Group.
d) Supporting of the compressor lines will generally involve a number of complicated
supports within a congested area. Insert plates for the supports on the underside of
a concrete tabletop must be specified at an early stage, these plates should cater
for attachment of rigging during compressor alignment.
e) The methodology and criteria for piping installation and compressor alignment must
be considered when considering the stress runs. (ie deflections of piping when
nozzle is disconnected for alignment).
f) Wherever possible, the deadweight loads on the nozzles should be as close to zero
as possible by the use of spring supports (As per comments in API 617 / NEMA SM
23)
20
g) Spring support variability around the equipment should be kept as low as practical
to keep cold nozzle loads to a minimum, constant effort type spring supports should
be considered.
d) Piping systems with Mission-Duo type Check Valves should be well supported
because of rotational creeping of the flange faces due to the long stud bolts.
e) Turbine piping analysis should include bypass line hot with trip and throttle valve
closed (i.e. equipment cold) as well as all operating and upset conditions.
4.6 Air Cooled Heat Exchangers (Air Fans)

Allowable nozzle loadings will be governed by the requirements of API-661.
Also see Section 13.6. Typically these heat exchangers are made to withstand 2 x the
loadings given in API-661.
4.6.1 Number of passes
a) An Air Fan with an odd number of passes has the inlet and outlet header boxes at
opposite ends of the exchanger and is preferred as there is no problem with
differential expansion between headers.
b) With even pass Air Fans, the inlet and outlet are on the same header box at one
end of the exchanger. If the header box is separated into two parts instead of a
design with a centre baffle, the differential expansion between the headers is no
longer a problem. Otherwise, the differential expansion between the inlet and outlet
manifolds should be carefully considered, and adequate flexibility put into the feed
lines or discharge lines from the exchanger to the manifold.
c) The expansion of the tubes can be controlled by placing directional anchors at the
header box. The location of these anchors should be carefully considered to
optimise the piping routing. It may be an advantage to allow some header boxes to
float free and be moved by the manifold expanding through short feed lines.
Mechanical linking of closely spaced header boxes may be considered to ensure
the inlet manifold and header boxes expand at the same rate.
d) Low friction pads under tube bundles should be considered to remove most of the
load transmitted to the nozzles via friction resistance of the header boxes. Caution
must be exercised with regard to temperature suitability (PTFE is limited to approx.
200oC). Specify the appropriate temperature and conditions to vendors supplying
low friction pads so that the correct material can be selected.
e) The clearances between the header box and the steel supports as it may be
necessary to cold-spring the headers to accommodate the thermal expansion.
21
4.7 Shell and Tube Exchangers (also see Section 13.5)

4.7.1 Anchor Location
The Stress Engineer should ensure the fixed and sliding ends are located at the ends
that give the best advantage.
4.7.2 Stacked Exchangers
Where exchangers are stacked, all interconnecting pipes should be reviewed for stress.
Where vendors supply exchanger arrangements that appear questionable, the stress
engineer should ask for back-up calculations from the vendor to prove that there will be
no flange leakage.
4.7.3 Exchangers equipped with bellows should be checked for loading, deflection or
angulation. Usually, expansion joints on exchangers are not designed for appreciable
lateral deflection.
4.8 Plate Exchangers
Allowable nozzle loadings will be in accordance with vendor allowables.
4.9 Plate Fin Exchangers - See Section 13.7.
4.10 Fired Heaters

Allowable nozzle loadings for fired heaters will be in accordance with the forces and
moments shown in API-560 (suitably factored). Factors up to 5 have been used in the
past.
4.10.1 Full appreciation of the effect of the external piping on the internals of the heater should
be considered and full consultation with the heater vendor should be conducted to
ascertain all the expansions and movements within his heater before a rigorous stress
analysis is conducted.
4.11 Tanks (also see Section 13.4)
Allowable loadings on tank shells are normally calculated in accordance with the
requirements of API-650. In other cases vendor allowables should be used.
4.11.1 Large storage tanks filled with liquid will be subject to tank bulge and the nozzles
subsequently rotated. Piping which restrains this movement will cause stresses in the
tank shell which must be within specific limits. The definition of tank bulge / nozzle
rotation / allowable loads will generally come under the responsibility of Vessels Group
and must be clarified early in the Project.
4.11.2 Tanks will be subject to settlement, the connection to the tank nozzle will be made after
hydrostatic testing. Future settlement shall be catered for by locating the first support
from the nozzle a suitable distance to prevent overloading. Exiting the tank and turning
the pipework through an elbow prior to installing first support may aid stress analysis.
Spring supports may be specified but a check must be made on nozzle loads if there is
a possibility of the line becoming drained in plant operation.
22
4.12 Nozzle Flexibility
4.12.1 Loads on Columns, drums, tanks and horizontal vessels will be reduced by considering
the flexibility of the nozzle connections to the vessel, instead of considering it as a fixed
anchor.
4.12.2 The nozzle flexibility can be calculated using one of the following:
a) British Standard BS5500 Appendix G : "Stresses from local loads."
b) Welding Research Bulletin No. 34 (1957) "Computation of the Stresses from Local
Loads on Spherical Pressure Vessels and Pressure Vessel Heads" by P.P. Bijlaard.
c) Welding Journal Research Supplement (1955) "Stresses from Radial Loads and
External Moments in Cylindrical Pressure Vessels" by P.P. Bijlaard.
Note: The methods and charts in (a) above were derived from (b) and (c) above.
4.13 Buried Pipe (See Section 13.25)
23
4.14 Cryogenic / Cold Pipework
Cryogenic service may be classified as COLD INSULATED piping systems in low

temp service, temperatures will generally be below -50°C, piping materials will primarily
be stainless steel or in limited cases low temp carbon steel.
Lines with Cold Insulation shall be identified from the Project Outset and must be
instantly recognisable from their insulation code.
Cryogenic piping is more critical than other low temperature piping as:
a) Support shoes are proprietary items with special high density load bearing
insulation, these items will not be fabricated to suit in the field, and require at least
a 6 month lead time before the R.O.S date.
b) It is possible to omit the requirement for cold shoes by attaining enough length on a
trunnion prior to reaching the support steelwork (generally T+4t from outside of
pipe), where T = Insul thickness on line and t = Insul thickness on trunnion. The
style of support arrangement will affect the trunnion loading and must be checked
for acceptability and also for the additional room the support will occupy. Note : For
Cold Uninsulated Piping the same criteria of T+4t shall be applied where
Insulation Thicknesses are obtained from the Project Specific Cold Insulation
Standard. Using this standard it will be possible to go into a table of values with line
size / appropriate line conditions and obtain a reference insulation thickness.
Examples of arrangements are shown in the Pipe Support Standard Appendix A
section A.3.7
c) Special attention is required to prevent water incursion into the insulation as this will
freeze and breakdown the insulation. This is achieved by ensuring a vapour barrier
around the whole system without any breaks.
d) Special cryogenic supports and anchors have to be used to prevent low
temperatures affecting the support steel and stopping ice build-up on the supports
creating unwanted anchor points.
Cryogenic anchors and line-stops should be given special attention as they tend to
be bulky and require more room than normal line-stops to install. (See Standard
Support CS13)
e) The material Elastic modulus increases by around 5% at these temperatures
making the whole system stiffer and increasing loads and stresses.
f) Special care must be made with any bellows as they must be protected from icing
up and being crushed. One method of doing this is to use a double bellows system
separated by insulation where the external bellows is used as a vapour barrier,
preventing the formation of ice in the active internal bellows. The material of the
bellows should be specially considered to prevent any brittle fracture of the thin
flexing membrane. Cryogenic systems containing bellows should not normally be
hydrotested as water will tend to be caught in the convolutions forming ice that
damages the convolutions during service.
24
Cold Service piping can generally be classified as COLD UNINSULATED piping which
will see low temperatures. These cold temperatures must be prevented from reaching
the supporting steelwork / icing up etc. Temperatures of concern will be below -20ºC
(Specific to each Project), materials will be Stainless Steel or ITCS. Isolation from cold
temperatures will be either an insulating material inside the clamps on clamped
supports or by permalli blocks (generally for temps below -50ºC).
4.15 High Noise Lines / Acoustic Insulation
Lines subject to high noise levels will be specified with acoustic insulation. Isolation of
the supports from the supporting structure will be required where the line could induce
excitation / vibration in the support member. This should be achieved by the fitting of
vibration absorbing pad assemblies under the pipe supports or having an acoustic wrap
inside the pipe supports. Lines subject to this phenomena must be identified at an early
stage in the Project and be instantly recognisable from the acoustic insulation code
type.
4.16 Acoustically Induced Vibration
This condition may be found in process vent lines, blowdown lines, safety relief valves,
control valves, and bursting disc discharges, compressor kickback lines, process or
steam letdown stations and restriction orifices.
The high levels of energy released at these locations cause very high in pipe turbulence
and noise levels. Fluctuating pressure in the pipe caused by this is sufficient on its own
to cause cyclic stresses in the pipe wall above the fatigue limit for the material.
Lines subject to this phenomena must be clearly identified on the P&ID's / complete
listing this will be generated by appropriate responsible parties.
Piping Group must adhere to the Project specific requirements for control of acoustic
fatigue some of the primary features for consideration in the design of the pipework will
be:
a) Thickening the pipe wall thickness locally or complete system.
b) Use clamped or welded supports with full encirclement pads.
c) Small bore connections must be suitably supported and reinforced with full
encirclement pads.
d) Branch connections to be at 45° with full encirclement pad where ratio of branch :
header exceeds 20%, otherwise 90 ° with full encirclement repad or alternatively
use a sweepolet fitting.
e) To avoid abrupt changes of direction, Immediately downstream of the pressure

reducer there must be at least 1 metre or 5x pipe diameters of straight pipe.
On systems which have multiple discharges into a common header, thickening of

the header wall thickness should eliminate the need for multiple adjacent full
25
encirclement re-pads at branch connections and around welded supports.
26
5.0 RECORDING AND TRANSMITTAL OF DATA
5.1 Piping Critical Line List
This is a list , which will be reviewed in accordance with the criteria for flexibility analysis
(See Section 13.0). The list shall record the method of analysis (i.e visual, approximate
or computer analysis), the file / run number where the hard copy is stored. The list shall
be updated as work progresses and shall be readily available for reference in the
master file set up as required for a particular project. The completed critical line list will
form part of the permanent records at the conclusion of engineering work.
5.2 Stress Sketches
5.2.1 Stress Sketches are produced by the Piping Designer, the Stress Engineers will be
familiarised with the stress sketch extraction procedure and hence be capable of
manipulating and producing stress sketches as system isometrics if required.
5.2.2 A data sheet exists for systems where the Stress Engineer is required to tabulate
information regarding piping deflections and nozzle and support loading .(Form
Kg1110L)
5.2.3 Generally the stress sketch is used to transmit results and information to Piping Design
and other groups. This is to minimise the number of information documents leaving the
section and minimise the production of conflicting information.
5.2.4 The Stress Sketch is used to transmit the following information:-
a. Pipe Support/ Anchor /Guide information to the piping design section, including
spring details.
b. Routing revisions: For piping design / pipe support section.
c. High line movements: for piping layout.
d. Equipment loads: for the Facilities Engineering group.
5.3 Calculation Sheets
5.3.1 Manual calculations MUST be written on the W.M. Kellogg standard calculation sheets
(Form No KG1204L)
Examples of such calculations include those relating to approximate methods of

analysis, calculation of vessel movement, API 610 pump loading resolutions, etc.
5.3.2 These are not normally used for transmitting information, but for any manual
calculations used to back-up any transmitted information.
5.4 Calculation Index
27
This will be produced in conjunction with the critical line list. See Section 13.0.
5.5 Expansion Joint Data Sheets
5.5.1 Bellows Expansion Joints
Form No. Kg1109.xls "Bellows Expansion Joints Data Sheet" is used for the requisition
of bellows expansion joints. The data sheet must be supplemented by a Specification
and the relevant stress sketch.
The Stress Engineer shall review the Purchasing Specification in order to ensure that it
fully meets the requirements of the particular bellows joint application.
The Purchasing Specification together with the Bellows Data Sheet will be issued by the
Stress Engineer to the Piping Materials Engineer who will prepare the Purchase
Requisition.
5.5.2 Victaulic and Viking-Johnson Type Expansion Joints
These types of expansion joints fall within the category of "Piping Specials" and are
therefore specified using a standard drawing sheet (Form No ????) showing a sketch of
the joint together with the appropriate dimensions and movements etc.
The Stress Engineer shall prepare the data sheet, and pass it to the Piping Materials
Engineer who will prepare the purchase requisition.
5.6 Spring Data Sheets
Appropriate data sheets for the type of spring designed, together with an index sheet
and spring summary sheet (see form Kg1108L) are used to requisition Pipe Support
Springs. The data sheets must be supplemented by a Spring Design Specification and
the appropriate Paint Specification.
Pipe Movements / friction shall be closely considered on Pedestal type springs, and,
where necessary, Stress shall request the springs to be furnished with low friction load
bearing flanges - (PTFE faced).
5.7 Snubbers
Mechanical shock arrestors, used to control piping loads / movements generally from
earthquake. An index sheets and individual datasheets are to be created and used in
requisitioning.
28
5.8 Inter Office Correspondence
5.8.1 An index shall be created for inter departmental correspondence, this will utilise a prefix
number to indicate the memo has been generated by Stress followed by a three figure
number taken from the index. Memo’s may be raised by all Stress Personnel but must
be countersigned by the Lead Stress Engineer or Lead Piping Engineer.
5.8.2 Loads applied to structures and foundations.

These are put on sketches/drawings (usually on the planning study) by the Stress
Engineer for transmission to the structural/civil group.
5.8.3 Loads applied to equipment.
This is where loads in excess of allowable values, or loads where no allowable values
have been agreed, are required to be absorbed by equipment. These loads are put on
sketches/drawings by the Stress Engineer for transmission to the Equipment group.
5.9 Isometrics
All isometrics will be reviewed and signed by a Stress Engineer.
All critical lines will be visually checked against the approved stress sketch: all non-
stress critical lines will be visually checked.
29
5.10 NUMBERING OF DOCUMENTS

5.10.1 The Piping Stress Critical Line List
The Critical Line List does not require a document number except when it is a
contractual requirement that it is to be issued to the Client or Inspection Authority.
In such cases it is normally sufficient to issue only the Lead Sheets giving the
definitions of critical lines for the contract, and not the Continuation Sheets listing the
line numbers of the critical lines.
5.10.2 The Stress Sketch

The drawing number for the Stress Sketch shall be in the form "Contract No - PPP-L-
123" Where PPP is the area number or identifier, and 123 is the sequential number.
This number is a calculation number and should be used with all calculations
associated with the piping system. A sketch showing a line passing through more than
one area shall be given a "PPP" No. from the area in which the line originates.
5.10.3 Summary of Pipe Stress Analysis Continuation Sheet

This sheet shall be numbered with the same number as the associated Stress Sketch.
(But given a different sheet No.)
5.10.4 Marked-up GA's, Planning Studies and other Drawings

As these cover lines without Stress Sketches, they should be numbered in sequence
with the Stress Sketches.
5.10.5 Calculation Index

This document is an internal document only and is generated by the Lead Piping
Engineer during the execution of the project.
The document number shall be obtained from the Lead Piping Engineer.
5.10.6 Calculations
Individual calculations (calculations sheets, computer results, etc) shall be identified by
the "Contract No - PPP-L-123" number of the associated Stress Sketch or other Stress
marked-up drawing. They shall also be referenced on the Stress Sketch. Note they
should be identified with a suffix to identify separately from the Stress Sketch (eg
"Contract No - PPP-L-123/A" for computer Run "A", "Contract No - PPP-L-123/AC1" for
Approximate Calculation No. 1).
5.10.7 Expansion Joint Data Sheet

These Data Sheets (together with the Tag Nos.) shall be numbered in accordance with
the Project numbering procedure.
30
5.11 FILING
The Stress Engineers' filing system shall be in accordance with the piping procedure for
filing documents.
All relevant data associated with a specific calculation shall be filed with that calculation
in a folder or binder ("Dossier"). This includes any manual calculations associated with
computer calculations, unless they form part of another specific calculation (e.g. the
pipe rack calculations). These folders shall be kept up to date as any changes are
noted so as to form current dossiers.
Computer printouts shall be printed on A4 or near A4 size paper and filed with the
relevant calculation stress sketch. This can usually be achieved using "condensed"
printing.
If special approval of calculations is required, such as in the case of "Stoomwezen"
approved projects, file clean-out shall be held back until approval has been achieved.
5.12 CLOSE-OUT / ARCHIVING

On completion of a project all calculation files shall be briefly reviewed and all non-
original items duplicated elsewhere, shall be thrown out (Unless essential to the
understanding of the calculation).
All other stress files shall then be briefly reviewed, and all non-original data,
procedures, standards, etc. shall be thrown out.
All remaining information shall be passed to the Lead Piping Engineer for archiving in
three sets of files:
a) Piping Stress Critical Line List.
b) Calculations
c) Stress Data and Correspondence
31
6.0 CHECKING PROCEDURE
All calculations produced by the Stress Engineers shall be checked by a Stress

Engineer who was not responsible for the original calculation. (If a revision was covered
by a separate engineer, he/she may also conduct a complete check as they have had
to already partly check the calculation during the revision review.)
6.1 Preliminary Review
6.1.1 At the preliminary issue stage, all Stress Sketches shall be reviewed by the Lead Stress
Engineer or his designate within each area to approve the general approach to the
calculation and to ensure the overall calculation looks reasonable.
6.1.2 Subsequent to this issue, the stress dossiers shall be maintained with details of any
significant changes marked on the reduced copies of the stress sketches, dated with
appropriate comments relating to the acceptance or otherwise, of the changes.
6.2 Critical lines in Dossiers
The checking of calculations in dossiers fall into 3 categories:
6.2.1 Complete check.
This check will require the following :
a) If it does not exist, create a Plot of the input geometry.

If multiple computer runs have been run, plot the secondary runs.
These prints shall be filed in the dossier.
b) Complete check of the computer input geometry against fabrication isometrics; and
inputted parameters (weight, expansion rates, applied loads and movements etc.).
Ensure the date of the runs match the latest version in the network.
c) Check of the basic Data : Temperatures, Pressures Insulation, Commodity, and wall
thickness against the latest line list and Piping material specification.
d) Check additional calculations of line weight, expansion rates, modulus of elasticity,

allowable stresses, wind loads, sway, nozzle deflections etc.
e) Check results tally with values and comments shown on the stress sketch.
f) Check that all relevant load cases have been run.
g) Check that the Piping System is adequately supported / restrained.
h) Check that the Engineering Checklist is included in calculation and signed off (see
attachment 1).
i) Copy the electronic pipe model files (usually Caesar) into the QA checked directory
32
set up for the project.
6.2.2 General check.
a) If it does not exist, create a Plot of the input geometry.

If multiple computer runs have been run plot the secondary runs.
These prints shall be filed in the dossier.
b) Spot check of the computer input geometry (10% of dimensions + reviewing (a)
above). Check inputted parameters (weight, expansion rates, applied loads and
movements etc.).
c) Check of the basic Data : Temperatures, Pressures Insulation, Commodity, and wall
thickness against the latest line list and Piping material specification.
d) Review additional calculations of line weight, expansion rates, modulus of elasticity,

allowable stresses, wind loads, sway nozzle deflections etc. (i.e. ensure the values
are reasonable)
e) Check results tally with values and comments shown on the stress sketch.
f) Check that all relevant load cases have been run.
g) Check that the piping system is adequately supported / restrained.
h) Check that the Engineering Checklist is included in calculation and signed off (see
attachment 1).
6.2.3 General Review
In this case the stress sketch should be reviewed to ensure the basic temperature data
relates to the latest Line List and any associated calculations are correct.
a) Check that the Engineering Checklist is included in calc and signed off (see
attachment 1).
33
6.3 Calculations relating to the Groups in 6.2
6.3.1 The calculations falling within "complete check" category (See paragraph 6.2.1) are as
follows:
All calculations relating to the following equipment :
a) Air fans
b) Compressors
c) Turbines
d) Three pump hookups at elevated temperatures.
e) All other equipment where Nozzle loads are above 75% of the allowable values
f) All calculations where the stress range is above 75% of the basic SA value in ANSI
B31.3.
6.3.2 The calculations falling within "General check" category (See paragraph 6.2.2) are all
computer calculations not included in 6.3.1.
6.3.3 The calculations falling within "General Review" category (See paragraph 6.2.3) are all
non-computer calculations (approximate calculations and visual review).
6.4 General implementation
6.4.1 All checks of computer calculation input data shall be confirmed by highlighting the
input data listing with a yellow highlighter.
6.4.2 All detailed checks of calculations on standard calculation sheets or similar, shall be
demonstrated by photocopying the calculation and "yellowing" it off as in 6.4.1. Such
check prints should be filed at the back of the dossier.
6.4.3 After checking, all calculation sheets checked should be signed and dated as checked.
6.4.4 After checking, the original stress sketches should be signed in the "chkd" and the other
boxes as appropriate (generally they will not be re-issued to piping). At this time all
significant modification comments shall be transferred from the checked dossier
comments to the original stress sketch with a comment covering the approval. (e.g.
"Revisions visually approved ABC (12/2/91)" where ABC are the checkers initials.)
6.4.5 Errors.
When errors are spotted, they should be commented upon on the check prints with a
note as to their impact. (not significant, or increases load by ..... still acceptable, etc.) If
the impact of the error is considered significant, the checker should re-run the
calculation and modify the stress sketch as applicable. If this impacts on loads sent for
approval, then the loads should be re-sent for approval after discussing the details with
34
the Lead Stress Engineer (who may consider that steps may be taken to reduce the
loads in another way).
6.4.6 Modifications due to errors.
Any modifications deemed necessary due to calculation errors should be discussed

with the Lead Stress engineer and the Lead Piping Engineer.
6.4.7 Any comments, assumptions, or discussions applicable to the calculation should be

written against the appropriate calculation or on additional calculation sheets.
6.4.8 Any comments or changes marked on any original calculation should be ballooned and
Triangle with the appropriate revision inside it written within the balloon. If the
calculation sheet has not been revised but merely checked, write "CHK" in the triangle.
6.4.9 On completion of checking, "Checked", the checkers initials, and the date should be
printed on the front sheet of the calculation.
35
Attachment 1
Contract: Calculation No
Client:
Project:
Discipline
ENGINEERING CHECKLIST
Are the following items included and checked Originator Checker
1. Pipe data complies with latest P&ID information
2. Route complies with latest study/PGA/CAD Model /Isometric
3. Material Specification, pipe data and branch Reinforcement .
4. Pipe design data is latest information Design Temperature
Design Pressure
Upset Temperature & Pressure
Steamout / De-coke etc.
Slugging (2 Phase Flow)
Operating/ Maintenance Procedures
5 Design cases established for analysis are “Worst Cases “.
6 Has Wind case been considered?
7 Has Earthquake been considered?
8 Has Pipe Bowing been considered ?
9 Has fire case been considered?
10 Has occasional weight case been considered?
11 Has Hydro case been Considered?
12 Has dynamic load from equipment been considered?
13 Has PSV/disc operation been considered?
14 Has settlement been considered?
15 Has steamout / Decoke been considered?
17 Has regeneration been considered?
18 Has steam tracing been considered?
19 Have springs been specified using correct loads i.e. latest vendor information?
20 Are stresses in accordance with ASME B31.3?
21 Equipment Information : Nozzle displacements
Fixed end/support positions
Allowable loading information available
22 Are pipe support locations and type shown on Stress Isometric and on Planning Study?
23 Has friction on supports been considered?
24 Has major support information been transmitted to Structural/ Civil Dept/and Vessels Dept
25 Have assumptions made been noted in analysis / on Stress Sketch?
26 Analysis complies with Stress Procedure
27 Terminal forces in analysis are less or equal to allowables.
28 Has any additional reinforcing at tees and trunnions been shown on stress sketch?
29 Documentation For Stress Report
System Description (Stress/ Flexibility Sketch FS-B- )
Calculations: Nozzle Flexibility Calc included
Branch reinforcement calculations for pressure
containment included
Equipment Loading Data / Sheets Vessels
Exchangers
Pumps
Computer Printout : Cases/ Title
Input
Restraint Summary
Max Stresses, Sustained Deflections
Springs, Snubber data etc.
SIGNED: DATE: Sign Sign
36
7.0 COMPUTER PROGRAMS
PC's shall be used on a project to minimise time used in the production of repetitive
calculations or in the production of standard indexes/reports where derivative
information is required.
It should be noted that all computer hardware and software should be included in the
Project IT Plan.
All computer programs shall be controlled in accordance with Instruction 1015 on the
Control, Licensing and Use of Software in procedure manual 2.0 and Section 6 of Desk
Manual 3.1.4 on the Control of Engineering Software.
7.1 Available Programs
Listed below are the currently available programs used by MWKL Piping Stress
Section:-
a) Caesar II pipe stress program ver 4.20

b) Simflex II pipe stress program
(Only to be used with permission from the Chief Engineer)
c) FE/Pipe Piping Finite Element Program
d) Asme31_3.xls. Pipe thickness calculation to ASME B31.3.
e) Asme31_4.xls. Pipe thickness calculation to ASME B31.4.
f) Asme31_8.xls. Pipe thickness calculation to ASME B31.8
g) Branch1.xls. Branch reinforcement calculation to ASME B31.3.
(For design of branch pads)
h) Branspec2.xls. Alternative branch reinforcement calculation to ASME B31.3
(For design of branch pads/ reinforcement type indication
for 2” to 24” size range.)
i) Ejma6.xls Bellows calculation.
j) Extrbran.xls Branch reinforcement calculation to ASME B31.3.
(for Extruded branches).
k) Nema2.xls Nozzle load calculation to NEMA std SM23.
8.0 ELECTRONIC TRANSFER OF INFORMATION
Transfer of pipe geometry information from Data Base programs “PDMS” or “PMS” to
Caesar II shall be in accordance with procedures described in documents
pdms_caes_proc.doc, or pds_caes_proc.doc respectively.
These are available in Engineering department directory:
O:\Engineering\Piping_E7100\Standards and Manuals\Manuals\Work Group Leader

Manual\4-1-149 Piping Stress Analysis WGL Manual
37
9.0 ELECTRONIC TRANSFER OF INFORMATION
Transfer of pipe geometry information from Data Base programs “PDMS” or “PMS” to
Caesar II shall be in accordance with procedures described in documents
pdms_caes_proc.doc, or pds_caes_proc.doc respectively.
These are available in Engineering department directory:
O:\Engineering\Piping_E7100\Standards and Manuals\Manuals\Work Group Leader

Manual\4-1-149 Piping Stress Analysis WGL Manual
10.0 STANDARD FORMS/CALC. SHEETS
Kg0784L.xls Flexibility Data Sheet.*

Kg0785Lxls Piping Stress Sketch.*
Kg1102L.xls Piping Bill of Material (Special Material).†
Kg1103L.xls Concrete Sleeper Schedule*
Kg1104L.xls Pipe Support Foundation Summary*
Kg1105L.xls Vessel Clip Summary Sheet*
Kg1106L.xls Vessel Clip Loading Sheet.*
Kg1107L.doc Pipe Support Design Information Sheet.*
Kg1108L.xls Spring Summary.*
Kg1109.xls Bellows Expansion Joints Data Sheet.*
Kg1110L.doc Nozzle Load Register.*
Kg1204L W.M. Kellogg Standard Calculation Sheet.
???? Calculation Cover Sheet.
???? Summary of Pipe Stress Analysis Continuation Form
???? Summary of Pipe Stress Analysis (alternate)
???? Stress and Supports Critical Line List
???? Stress Calculation Index
Items marked “*” are available in directory:-

O:\Engineering\Piping_E7100\Standards and Manuals\FORMS\STRESS
Or
O:\Engineering\Piping_E7100\Work_in_progress\FORMS\STRESS
Or in the engineering manual web site.
Item marked “†” are available in directory:-

O:\Engineering\Piping_E7100\Standards and Manuals\FORMS\MATERIAL
Or
O:\Engineering\Piping_E7100\Work_in_progress\FORMS\MATERIAL
38
11.0 BASIC DATA REQUIRED AT THE START OF A PROJECT AND DEFAULT VALUES
FOR INITIAL CALCULATIONS.
The following information should be confirmed with the appropriate project standards and
specifications at the outset of a project.
If the information is not readily available the values given below may be used as interim values
until confirmation can be obtained from the client or appropriate authority.
11.1 Piping Properties:
For standard pipe dimensions, weights for pipe and fittings, and pipe properties see “Excel”
spread sheet Pipedata.xls.
Standard dimensions for flanges up to 24” see ASME B16.5. For flanges larger than 24”, see
ASME B16.47 (covers flanges up to 60”).
Standard dimensions for fittings are covered by ASME B16.9.
11.2 Piping Code:
Petrochemical Projects : Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping ASME B31.3
Power Projects : Power Piping ASME B31.1
Pipelines (Liquid) : Liquid Transport Systems for Hydrocarbons, Liquid
Petroleum Gas, Anhydrous Ammonia and Alcohol ASME B31.4
(Gas) : Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping ASME B31.8
11.3 Temperatures:
England : Ambient -10°C TO 30°C

Installation 5°C
Solar 35°C
Northern Europe & Canada Ambient -20°C TO 30°C
: Installation 0°C
Solar 35°C
Central Europe & USA : Ambient -20°C TO 30°C
Installation 0°C
Solar 50°C
Middle East, Africa, Far Ambient 0°C TO 50°C
East & Tropical Installation 20°C
Climates Solar 85°C
39
11.4 Wind Loads (also see Section13.17):

a) Based on BS CP3 Chapter 5 : Code of Basic Data for the Design of Buildings -
Loading - Part 2: Wind Loads
In the absence of further information, use a design wind speed of 50 m/s with a
Topography factor S1 of 1.0, ground roughness of 2 with building class B (to
calculate factor S2 as per table 3), and factor S3 of 1.0.
b) Based on ASCE 7-95: "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures"
In the absence of further information, use a basic wind speed of 90 mph with a
Exposure type C, Cf factor of 0.8, qz factor of 32 lb/ft 2 and an Importance factor of
1.0. with a base elevation of 10m unless the elevation above ground level is known.
Coastal areas may have considerable higher loads. Storm force gusts could be in
the region of 60m/s or more. Due allowance should be made.
11.5 GUIDE LOADS

A table of allowable guide spacings is drawn up in the Pipe Support Standard
The loads acting on guides are caused by three basic sources:
a) Thermal Expansion
b) Wind Loads
e) Dynamic Loads (Earthquake and water-hammer or other shock loadings.)
11.5.1 Thermal Loads
These loads will be calculated by the stress engineer where they are seen to be of significant
magnitude. Otherwise they will be of a lesser magnitude than the other loads.
11.5.2 Wind Loads
Wind Loads can be calculated using the following formula:
Wind Load = (P x D x GS x Sf) / 1000 (KN)
Where P = Wind Pressure (KN/m2)

D = Pipe + Insulation Dia. (mm)
GS = Guide Spacing (m)
A reasonable value of wind pressure to use in the absence of any project specific
information is 1.6 KN/m2. Ideally project specific information should be sought.
40
11.5.3 Dynamic Loads. (Also see Section 13.19)
For loads other than Earthquake loads, the values will be calculated on an individual
basis by the stress engineer.
Earthquake Loads can be calculated using the following formula:
Earthquake Load = C x W x GS (KN)
Where C = Earthquake Factor

= 0.25 for Zone 1
= 0.5 for Zone 2
= 1.0 for Zone 3
W = Weight of Pipe + Insulation + Commodity (KN/m)
GS = Guide Spacing (m)
11.6 Wind Deflection of Columns and Structures
Initial calculations can use a value of L/200 where L is the elevation of the column or
structure. This should be confirmed by the vessel/structural group for the specific column
of structure as soon as possible.
11.7 Coefficient of Friction
Steel to Steel: Coefficient of Friction = 0.3

Steel to Concrete: Coefficient of Friction = 0.4
PTFE to PTFE/ Polished St. Steel Coefficient of Friction = 0.1
11.8 Settlement
Values for absolute and differential settlement on a plant should be established at the
outset of the project.
11.9 Earthquake
Values for earthquake accelerations on a plant should be established at the outset of the
project.
11.10 Column Skirt Expansion (See Section 13.2)
11.11 Insulation Weight
Until definitive values are available use 150 Kg/m3 insulation density.
41
12.0 STANDARD ALLOWABLE LOADS
Information for the allowable loads on equipment / nozzles, should be confirmed with the
Equipment Group and with the appropriate project standards and specifications at the outset of
a project.
42
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
NUMBER
13.0.1. INTRODUCTION
13.0.2. CATEGORIES OF PIPING, ANALYSIS & DOCUMENTATION
13.0.2.1 CATEGORY 1 PIPING
Figure 1 CHART OF CATEGORY TYPES AGAINST
TEMPERATURE.
13.0.3. EXTENT OF ANALYSIS
13.0.3.1 Simplifying Piping for Analysis
13.0.3.2 Guidelines for Computer Run Options
13.0.3.3 Guidelines for Rotating Equipment
13.0.4 FORMAT OF ANALYSIS
13.0.4.1 General
. 13.0.4.2 Preparation of Calculations
13.0.5. STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTORS
13.0.5.1 Codes Requirements
13.0.5.2 Use with Caesar Calculations
43
13.0.1 INTRODUCTION
The following practices are adopted with regard to Pipe Stress Analysis by M.W.
Kellogg Ltd. Their adoption is based on MWKL's experiences that the quality of the
plant is not compromised while expediting the design process and reducing
document volumes. These practices are, however, constantly reviewed for necessary
modifications in response to new technical advancements and availability.
Contractual requirements of Clients, where specifically different from these practices
shall govern when agreed upon by the Chief Piping Engineer (CPE). All differences
shall be reviewed and approved by the CPE at the start of each project and become
part of the Technology Work Plan.
Guidelines set forth for the categorisation and subsequent level of analysis and
documentation are meant to convey the policy of MWKL and are not to be taken as
absolute. These guidelines, used by competent engineers, will provide for safe and
reliable piping systems. Some deviations based on the engineer's judgement are
expected. However, if many systems are judged to be other than as noted, a review
of the basis with the CPE is required.
Depending on the criticality of service and degree of complexity, all piping is divided into
five categories. Category 1 piping is expected to be the most critical and complex
and category 5 is the least complex.
In section 2, definition of all five categories is provided along with the required
methods of analysis, documentation and quality control requirements. Sections 3 and
4 contain guidelines for the extent of analysis and format of analysis respectively,
whereas guidelines regarding the use of stress intensification factors are provided in
section 5.
13.0.2 PIPING CATEGORIES
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
Definition:
Piping in this category are those that may require designs and analyses.
Generally, these systems are not covered in the Piping Stress Design Manual.
Code methods also may not provide all formulae to analyse without significant
interpretation. Computer analysis may also be beyond the scope of approved
computer programs.
Piping falling into this category is to be brought to the attention of the CPE for
approval, with recommendations for:
1. Method of analysis
2. Any applicable special work processes.
3. Document Classification number as per the Piping Stress Analysis Desk Manual
3.1.9, section: 1.3.
This review should be done very early in the project and prior to any formal analysis or the
establishment of any support or analysis philosophy.
A few examples of this category are listed below. The Piping Stress engineer
should bring to the attention of Lead Piping Engineer any additional item(s) he
feels appropriate.
24368. Piping in high pressure service where the pressure is in excess of that
44
allowed by ASME B16.5 Class 2500 rating for the specified design
temperature and pressure.
24369. Piping for Category M fluid.
24370. Piping in high temperatures service where the design metal
Temperature exceeds 540oC.
24371. Lines designed for greater than 22,000 cycles.
24372. Piping requiring fatigue analysis. This analysis may be due to
pressure cycles, thermal cycles or a combination of both.
24373. Piping requiring analysis using response spectrum method. An
example of this is a dynamic analysis for earthquake loading.
24374. Piping using unrestrained metallic expansion joints.
24375. Piping subject to thermal bowing.
24376. Piping in Category 2 which, in the judgement of the analyst, should
have analyses in excess of those required for Category 2.
10. Piping with diameters exceeding 48".
B Method of Analysis
Analysis requirements will be identified on a case by case basis. This is done
by filling out the "Identification of Special Designed Systems and Components
Form" (ISDSC) in accordance with Section 4.4.1 of The Piping Stress WGL
Manual and submitting it to the CPE.
C Documentation and Quality Assurance
Documentation is required and the extent of documentation depends on the
analysis requirements as identified on the "ISDSC". All analysis requirements
are to be documented clearly. Requirements are identified on a case by case
basis. For example, a 54" cooling water underground line will have a different
level of analysis than a 54" line at 650oC.
D. Quality Assurance
Piping in this category falls into Document Classification 3 as per the Piping
Stress Analysis Desk Manual 3.1.9, section: 1.3.
A. Definition
Piping in this category are similar to those listed under category 3 but have some added
complexity that requires additional considerations. This could be that the piping in the
judgement of WGL is large and complex. It could also be that the acceptance criteria
are other than that designated by ASME B31.3 as meeting the requirements of the
longitudinal stress due to pressure, weight, and other sustained loads per 302.3.5c or
allowable displacement stress range per 302.3.5d.
A few examples of this category are listed below:
24377. Large and complex piping systems such as:
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb
Ethylene transfer piping
cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccc
45
Refractory lined piping

24378. Piping requiring static earthquake or wind analysis.
24379. Piping requiring acoustic study.
B. Method of Analysis
These piping systems are analysed by using computer programs such as Caesar II or if
especially requested Simflex II, and methods contained in the Piping Stress Design
Manual.
C. Documentation
Following documentation is required:
24380. Stress isometric
24381. Computer and manual calculations
24382. Acceptance criteria summary
D. Quality Assurance
Piping in this category falls into Document Classification 2 as per the Piping Stress
Analysis Desk Manual 3.1.9, section: 1.3.
46

KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
Definition
Piping in this category is those that require formal analysis because of their diameter
and temperature considerations or those that are connected to sensitive equipment.
Sensitive equipment is of two types. One type of sensitive equipment is load sensitive
equipment for which nozzle loads are limited by vendor requirements or industry
standards. The other type of equipment is stress sensitive equipment for which nozzle
stresses are limited.
The acceptance criteria for piping in this category are clearly defined by code
methods and/or by Piping Stress Design Manual.
Lines in this category are listed below:
24383. Lines connected to Load Sensitive Equipment:
ddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddddd
Lines connected to reciprocating pumps and compressors, centrifugal
compressors, and turbines whose normal operating temperature
exceeds 120oC and are ≥ 3" NB.
eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Lines connected to non-reciprocating pumps and with the following
conditions:
24464. Are 4" or larger and normally operate at ≥150oC.
24465. Are 12" or larger and normally operate at
≥120oC.
24466. Lines one size or more larger than equipment
nozzle and normally operate at ≥120oC.
fffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
Air-cooler piping.
24384. Lines connected to Stress Sensitive Equipment:
ggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggg
Lines connected to ASME Section VIII Division 2 vessels.
hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh
Lines connected to fired heaters or furnaces.
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
Lines connected to aluminium equipment.
24385. All lines designated as Category 3 in figure 1.
24386. Piping in category 4 requiring formal analysis in the judgement of the
analyst.
LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL
Method of Analysis
Formal analysis required for piping in this category will in general be done by approved
computer programs. However, under appropriate circumstances analysis may also be
done by recognised approximate hand calculation methods as per section 13.24 of this
Design Manual
47
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
Documentation
Following documentation is required:
24387. Stress isometric
24388. Computer and/or manual calculations
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Quality Assurance
Analysis Desk Manual 3.1.9, section: 1.3.
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Definition
Lines in this category are listed below:
24389. Lines connected to sensitive equipment listed in category 3 but do not
fall in category 3 due to their size or temperature.
24390. All lines designated as Category 4 in figure 1.
PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
Method of Analysis
Piping in this category require mandatory investigate which could be done by using
recognised approximate methods as per section 13.24 of this Design Manual.
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Documentation
Documentation is required, but the extent of documentation may be limited to showing
thermal expansion and length of Piping offset required for flexibility. This may be
accomplished by making a piping routing sketch on A4 or A3 calculation sheets and
showing pertinent restraints and movements.
Each calculation should have line number and block/area number so that calculation can
be filed in alpha-numerical order in the area calc book. Formal calculation numbers are
not required for these calculations.
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR
Quality Assurance
Analysis Desk Manual 3.1.9, section: 1.3. Spot check or review of the calculations is
done at the discretion of the Lead Stress Engineer.
48

SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
Definition
Piping in this category are in low or ambient temperature range and are of relatively
small size. They are identified as category 5 piping in figure 1.
TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
Method of Analysis
Piping in this category require only visual inspection with or without the aid of a guided
cantilever chart or similar short cut methods of analysis.
UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU
Documentation
Documentation is not required. However, documentation that a review has been
performed is required such as via a suitable indication on the critical line list and a
signature on the isometric or:
24391. For a Manual Plant Layout project, it will be done by noting letters
"FR" (Flexibility Reviewed) on the Plant Layout drawing along with
analysis temperature and line material.
24392. For a 3-D Model project, it will be done by placing a "Visually
Reviewed" comment. ("Planning Comment") in the model. The comment
shall include the letters "FR" along with the analysis temperature and line
material.
24393. An example comment is:
FR, 300 F, SS
FIGURE 1
CHART OF CATEGORY TYPES AGAINST TEMPERATURE.
F 400O
L CATEGORY 3 PIPE
E 350O CAT
4
X
300O PIPE
T 250O
E
M 200O
P CATEGORY 4 PIPE
150O
E
R 100O
A
50O
T
CATEGORY 5 PIPE
U 0O
R
E -50O
-75O
O
-100O
C CATEGORY 3 PIPE
-150O
-200O
2” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 14” 16” 18” 20”
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE

49
13.0.3 EXTENT OF ANALYSIS

13.0.3.1 SIMPLIFYING PIPING FOR ANALYSIS
For computer analysis, minimise the extent of piping to be analysed. This can be done by
using restraints to divide the piping into parts of various degrees of flexibility; and
then analysing only the parts with clear flexibility problems. For example, for lines
connected to sensitive equipment, see if it is possible to analyse only the part of the
system in the vicinity of the equipment with the rest of the system isolated by
restraints and which clearly has appropriate flexibility.
13.0.3.2 GUIDELINES FOR COMPUTER ANALYSIS OPTIONS
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
Following computer analysis options are required for category 3 piping:
24394. Thermal cases only
24395. Weight case or combined weight and thermal (a) for lines connected
to load sensitive equipment when the piping system cannot (or will not, e.g.,
core exchanger) be aligned as discussed in Para. 3.3A on page 11, or (b) for
lines with multiple spring systems where it is a definite benefit to use a
computer analysis. These cases are normally not run otherwise.
Note that when a weight load case only is run and a temperature is input, the
SIMFLEX II program will use the temperature to identify any inactive
support, as a result of thermal growth, before calculating the weight loads at
the remaining supports.
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Additional analysis required for category 1 and 2 piping will be identified on a case by
case basis.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Do not run (the following cases) unless the specific case warrants and with the Work
Group Leader's concurrence:
24396. Combined weight and thermal (except for lines connected to load
sensitive equipment).
24397. Wind.
24398. Multi Temperature cases, (select the most extreme only) unless
necessary for connected equipment loads.
24399. Lines in yard for loop sizing or anchor loads.
50
13.0.3.3 GUIDELINES FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT

YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
Rotating Equipment allowable loads are permissible loads for long term continuous
operation. These loads are therefore compared with the calculated piping loads
based on normal operating load cases. Temperatures used for determining
operating loads should be based on actual operating conditions and not on line
list design temperatures which will typically allow for extreme conditions like
steam out. When occasional loads are included (e.g. Wind or Earthquake), it
may be permissible to increase nozzle load limits; above that for normal
operating cases. Any increase shall be agreed with the equipment vendor.
Normal operating nozzle loads are to be compared to allowables (given by
pump vendors or one of the industry standards) in order to confirm acceptability
of the system. In order calculate operating loads on nozzles correctly set up
without weight loads; the following procedure should be used:
1) Set up pipe model with only weight loads (without friction) while modelling
the connection to the rotating equipment as a free end.
2) Note the deflections/rotations for the free end as determined in 1) and
impose these values as nozzle deflection/rotations in the actual model(s)
used to calculate nozzle loads. These deflection /rotations will be in addition
to any nozzle deflections for the equipment it self. Friction should be applied
for models covering operating conditions which include the thermal case.
Separate models will be required for wind or seismic loads where friction
should not be imposed.
3) Nozzle loads will be given by operating cases which include weight,
pressure, temperature, deflections and where appropriate wind and
earthquake or other imposed loads (e.g. valve operating torque).
The field millwright will provide for proper alignment of piping by adjusting
support systems and/or localised heating to parallel flanges. This process
removes weight as a consideration for nozzle loading.
Cases do exist, typically limited to certain off-site locations, where pump piping cannot
practically be supported in accordance with normal engineering practices (i.e. supports
located so that the piping weight can be removed from the nozzle), and some weight
load is exerted on the pump nozzle. Only vertical weight load would remain as the
weight moments are removed during the alignment process.
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
Unusual design or
flexibility temperature conditions need to be investigated when the resulting
load, estimated by simple temperature ratio, exceeds allowable nozzle loads by
more than 50%. The same is true for seismic events; However, this should be
tempered with sensible engineering judgement. Noting, for example, that
friction, where it exists, always opposes movement.
The postulated design condition is to protect the component against upset short-term conditions
such as steam-out, loss of fluid, and so forth which occur mostly when the rotating
equipment are not operating. Those events which occur while the equipment is in
operation, including seismic, are of a short time nature and the contribution to bearing
or seal wearing is minimum.
Steam-out is a non-operating condition used to clean a piping system. Typically
pipe flanges are not connected or may be loosely bolted to the pump. This
51
allows for the insertion of a protective plate at the pump and an exit point for
debris and steam. Pump nozzle loading is not to be evaluated for steam-out
conditions unless pump nozzles are connected during steam out in which case
nozzle load limits should be agreed with the vendor.
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
Reaction loads calculated by Simflex or Caesar, are based on the cold modulus of
elasticity. These values, when checking rotating equipment nozzles loads, may
be reduced by the appropriate ratio of hot modulus to cold modulus in order to
bring the loads within the allowable.
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
Piping systems which satisfy rotating equipment nozzle load requirements at
operating conditions will generally have pipe stresses less than 1/3 of the code
allowables, therefore checking for stress compliance is typically not required.
However, stresses in piping systems with significant design or flexibility
temperature variations from operating temperatures should be reviewed. These
stresses can be estimated by a simple temperature ratio and should be
compared to code allowables.
52
13.0.4 FORMAT OF ANALYSIS

13.0.4.1 GENERAL
Whether the analysis is done manually or by computer by computer, it should be identified
by a calculation number. This Calculation Number should be listed in the calculation
Index and in the Critical Line List against the appropriate lines. This is to identify
the lines during production for which a calculation exists. Below, requirements for
these calculations are discussed briefly.
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
The Stress Isometric required for Category 1, 2 and 3 piping should be prepared in
one of several ways listed below. The analyst should remember that the Stress
Isometric information will be used during the Production (Detail Design) phase
of the project, as well as during Project Closeout/construction to respond to field
questions and/or troubleshoot field problems.
24400. Manually drawn on MWKL Pipe Stress Isometric from KG-1766 (12-
89), and contain all the pertinent information listed in 4.2.A.
24401. A computer Isometric plot, with all the pertinent information listed in
4.2.A added to the plot. [NOTE: The analyst may find it efficient to copy,
complete and attach the "title block" portion of form KG-1766 to the
computer Isometric plot.]
13.0.4.2 PREPARATION OF CALCULATIONS
Preparation of manual and computer calculations shall be in accordance with the section 4.4.
of the Piping Stress WGL Manual. When a formal computer calculation is
performed, the stress isometric and calculation print-out shall conform to the
following minimum requirements.
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Stress isometric shall include:
24402. Job number, Line number(s), Calculation number, File number
including run number (information printed on page 1 of Caesar II output).
This is to identify clearly the computer output with the isometric.
24403. Line size, wall thickness/schedule, and material
24404. Operating temperature and flex temperature
24405. North arrow and X, Y and Z orientation
24406. Equipment and nozzle designations
24407. Node points
24408. Support and Restraint designators (do not designate all yardbents as
node points, if not necessary)
24409. All dimensions including vertical dimensions (co-ordinates/elevations
are preferred) (dimension lines not necessary unless for clarity)
9. Sign-off as per requirements of the Piping Stress Analysis Desk Manual 3.1.9,
section: 1.3.
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
Calculations
24410. Print-outs shall be on A4 paper.
53
24411. Sign-off as per requirements of the Piping Stress Analysis Desk

Manual 3.1.9, section: 1.3.
54
13.0.5. STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTORS

13.0.5.1 CODE REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with the requirements for piping designed to ASME B31.3, stress
intensification factors are to be used when calculating longitudinal bending stresses due
to fatigue type loading. They are not to be used when analysing ductile material for
steady state stresses such as pressure. ASME B31.3 stress intensification requirements
for bending stresses due to such items as weight appear to be 0.75 of the fatigue values,
based on B31.3 Interpretation 1-34 dated Feb 23, 1981. Later interpretations do not
require an SIF of more than 1 for sustained stresses. However the resulting SIF of 0.75i
should not be less than 1.
B Stress intensification factors are used for steady state stress when designing
systems in accordance with ASME B31.1 which requires 75% of the
intensification factor be used for steady state stress.
55
13.0.5.2 CAESAR II ANALYSIS/CODE REQUIREMENTS

A. Caesar will automatically use 100% of the code stress intensification factor when
calculating stresses for a weight case unless over ridden using Configure/setup in the
“Tools” menu using the “SIFS and Stresses” section. It will also use 100% of the code
stress intensification factor when a thermal plus weight case is specified and for areas
where 0.75i is less than 1.
B. Unacceptable stresses due to sustained loads should be reviewed to see if reduction due
to an unnecessary use of the stress intensification factor would bring the stresses to an
acceptable level.
C. Reaction Loads
Reaction loads are calculated by Caesar based on the cold modulus of elasticity. These values,
when checking rotating equipment nozzle loads, should be reduced by the appropriate
ratio of hot modulus to cold modulus; if this would bring the loads within the allowable.
56
13.1.0 Equipment Loads
a) Maximum allowable loads applied to equipment Nozzles should be agreed with

the equipment vendor as early as possible. Also see sections 13.2 to 13.14 as
appropriate for the equipment concerned. Specialist equipment nozzle allowable
loads will have to be as per manufacturers recommendations.
b) Loads on equipment that should be considered are the maximum combination

of cases. Table 1 shows base load cases for consideration, these are to be
checked and if necessary manipulated to suit analysis / Project requirements.
13.1.1 Load Combinations
13.1.2 Load Summary:
Loads and stresses Caused by expansion due to:
1a) Design Temperature.

1b) Normal Operating Temperature.
1c) Solar / Ambient Temperatures (Depending on Insulation).
1d) Steam out.
1e) Steam tracing.
1f) Regeneration
1g) Decoke
1h) Pipe Bowing
1i) Fire
1j) Equipment Expansion
Let 1x) = Maximum of 1a), 1c), 1e)

1y) = Maximum of 1d), 1f), 1g)
Sustained Loads and Stresses due to:
2a) Design Pressure

2b) Hydrotest / Pneumatic Test
2c) Vacuum Design
2d) Operating Weight
2e) Occasional Weight
2f) Hydrotest Load
Dynamic and Other Loads and Stresses:
3a) Seismic
3b) Dynamic loads from equipment.
3c) Wind
3d) PSV and Rupture Disc Reaction
3e) Slug Flow and Valve opening/closure
3f) Settlement
57
Table 1
Load combinations to be considered acting on equipment Nozzles.

Load: \ Case: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1x) Maximum Design expansion x x x x x x x
1y) Maximum Occasional Expansion x
1b) Normal Operating Expansion
1h) Pipe Bowing x
1i) Fire
1j) Equipment Expansion x x x x x x x x
2a)/(2c) Design Pressure or Vacuum x x x x x x x x
design
2b) Test Pressure x
2d) Operating Weight x x x x x x x x
2e) Occasional Weight x
2f) Hydrotest Weight x
3a) Seismic Load x
3b) Dynamic Load from Equipment x x x x x x x x
3c) Wind x x
3d) PSV or Rupture Disc Reaction x
3e) Slug Flow etc. x
3f) Settlement x x x x x x x x
The above table is to be used as a guide for the formulation of case runs.
58
VERTICAL VESSELS
13.2.1 GENERAL STATEMENT
This manual subject provides design information concerning the supporting and guiding of all
piping connected to vertical vessel nozzles.
The structural design of supports and guides, and the structures, are provided by the Vessel
Design Group. However, the location on the vessel and the design criteria is calculated by
Piping Mechanical and indicated on the Piping Planning Drawings to achieve the proper pipe
stress analysis, pipe flexibility and vessel nozzle loading.
13.2.2 VESSEL EXPANSION (FOR UNLINED VESSELS)
The thermal expansion movements of vessel nozzles due to process temperatures must be
calculated in order to accurately analyse the connecting piping. The thermal expansion
movement of any elevation on a vertical vessel is the skirt axial thermal expansion, plus, the
summation of the axial thermal expansion of all of the constant temperature vessel shell zones
below the subject elevation. The radial thermal expansion movement is based on the vessel
radius at the desired elevation and the local zone temperature.
13.2.2A Vertical Skirt Expansion
The axial or vertical movement of the lower vessel tangent line due to the skirt thermal expansion
is calculated by using the average temperature of the skirt (see example below) and the skirt
height.
Example: calculate the average temperature of the skirt
Give the following conditions:

T = 600ºF
h = 10'-0"
t = 1”
K = 1 (skirt is fully insulated)
Step 1. Calculate K * h/(√t) = 1*10/1”
Step 2. Enter the Chart no. 1 at the point along the bottom line where
K*h/√t= 10. Then move vertically to the point where the curve is intersected.
Then move horizontally to the left to find the temperature correction factor
"F”
which in this example is equal to 0.22.
59
CURVE FOR DETERMINATION OF AVERAGE SKIRT TEMPERATURE (T1)
“h 0 2
4 6
” 8 10
“ 12
T “t” 14
” 16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
Kh/√t
60
Step 3. ∆T = T -70ºF = 530ºF
Step 4. ∆T1 = F*∆T = 0.22 * 530 = 116.6ºF use 117ºF
Step,5. T1 = LT1 + 70ºF = 117ºF + 70ºF = 187ºF

Alternatively the formulas below maybe used:-
The temperatures used for calculating skirt expansions are taken from the equation:
Average Skirt Temp (°C) = (T-Ta)F + Ta

T = Temperature at top
of skirt (ºF) Ta = Ambient Temp. (°C)
T1= Average temperature T = Temp @ top of Skirt (°C)
of skirt(ºF) EMBED
h = Height of skirt in feet. Equation.2 EMBED
t = Thickness of skirt in Equation.
inches. 2
CHARK= 1 for skirt fully K = Insulation
T NO.insulated. Constant = 1.0 Firebrick Insulated
1 K = 1.7 for skirt fireback = 1.6 Non-insulated
insulation. h = Skirt Height - mm
K = 2.7 for skirt not
insulated. t = Skirt wall thickness - mm
F = Temperature
correction factor.
13.2.2B Vessel Shell Thermal Expansion
The axial or vertical thermal expansion of the vessel shell from the lower tangent line is to be
based on the vessel outlet nozzle locations and design temperatures. The vessel shell
temperature between two adjacent outlet nozzles is calculated as the average of the design
temperatures of those two nozzles. The "design temperature" should be used with caution for
cold vessels where the design temperature may be the lowest in the thermal cycle. Vessel
growth between adjacent outlet nozzles is the distance (change in elevation for vertical
growth and vessel radius for radial growth) times the expansion rate (in/ft or mm/mm as
required) for that vessel temperature zone. The total vertical growth at any elevation is the
skirt growth plus the summation of vertical growth in each constant temperature zone below
the subject elevation.
“F”
61
13.2.2C Vertical Vessel Growth Example
150OC
F/F EL. 51.8m
CL EL.42.67m 205OC
66OC, CL EL. 35.05m

CARBON
STEEL T.L. EL. 32.92m, 260OC
UNINSULATED SKIRT
25mm THICK
P.O.S. EL. 30.78m
For metric units
Growth - P.O.S. to Tangent Line (T.L.)

K * h/√t = 1.6 (2140) / 5 = 684.8; F = 0.12
average skirt temperature = 21.11 + 0.12(260- 21.11) = 49.8ºC
-4
expansion coef. = 3.4167x 10 mm/mm
Growth = 3.4167 x 10-4x 2140 = 0.731mm
Growth T.L. to EL. 42.67m

temperature between nozzles = (205+260)/2 = 232.5OC
expansion coef. = 2.633x10-3 mm/mm
Growth = 2.633x10-3 x 9750 = 25.67mm
Growth EL. 42.67m to 51.8m
temperature between nozzles = (205+150)/2 = 177.5OC
expansion coef. = 1.8833-3 mm/mm
Growth = 1.8833-3 x 9130 = 17.2mm
Total Growth P.O.S. to EL. 48.77m

Growth = 0.731 + 25.67 + 1.8833-3 x (48770-42670)
= 37.9mm Growth.
62
13.2.3 TOWER PIPING FLEXIBILITY ISO

All of the piping routed vertically up the vessel, piping connecting to all of the nozzles, utility
piping and any speciality piping requiring supporting must be analysed. The piping isometrics
used for calculations may be drawn by Piping Mechanical, Piping Design or highlighted by the
computer system as defined in the Job Documentation.
13.2.4 PIPING SUPPORT BRACKETS
All of the piping support brackets on the vessel are designed and purchased by the Vessel
Mechanical Group. The support design criteria and elevation is calculated by Piping Mechanical
when performing the stress calculations for the supported piping. The piping support bracket is
called for on the Planning Study Drawings, on Vessel layout drawings or in the PDS model as
determined by Vessel Mechanicals requirements. The Vessel Mechanical Standard Pipe
Supports should be used unless the design requirements exceed the standard capability (See
Table 1). The supported elevation required and any special size steel needed for pipe supports
shall be noted along with the standard pipe support designation. If the standard support bracket
capability is exceeded then a special support bracket shall be called for defining the loading, the
elevation, any special dimensions and any special steel size requirements. Special brackets are
also called for where grouped lines are required (such as on small diameter vessels).
The support bracket elevation should be as close to the nozzle as possible. This can be defined
by the support bracket attachment clips, or possibly by the-piping elbow length and the
supporting trunnion required diameter. The overhead piping support elevation should be defined
by the Vessel Top Tangent Line and the support bracket clip dimensions. In setting the support
bracket elevations, be sure to check for interferences between the support bracket clips attached
to the vessel and items such as nozzles, nozzle reinforcing pads, platform clips and known weld
seams.
All piping supports from vertical vessels must be checked during the production phase of the job.
This check includes verification that the piping support bracket requested on the Planning Study
Drawings has been designed will be supplied, and meets the requirements. Verification that the
piping support bracket was merely called for on a Planning Study Drawing is not adequate.
Table 1
Maximum Standard Vessel Mechanical Pipe Support Bracket Capacities
1. Maximum Pipe Size of 60” diameter.
2. Maximum VL at a distance Lc per table below.
Lc = Distance from shell to centerline of VL
Lc (m) = 0.914; 1.219 1.829 2.438 3.048
VL(N) = 533.8 489.4 444.9 400.4 355.9
63
Piping support bracket planning comments on vessels shall contain the following
information:
13.2.4A Support Brackets on Hot Insulated Lines
Hot insulation is generally 70OF (21OC) and above. Consult project "P" Class Summary for job-
specific requirements.
Specify: 1. Single or double bracket by vessel (See Fig. 1 page 7).
2. TOS elevation.
3. Magnitude and source(ie; oper, test) of vertical Load.
4. Sketch of bracket, or model appropriate element in PDS.
(Note: Std brkt overhang is 230mm; if more overhang is required, it must be
specified.)
5. Dimension "S", if a spring or rod hanger is required. In PDS, locate brackets per
“S” dimension.
6. Type of ' spring or hanger, if "-)" is specified; i.e., base spring or rod hanger.
Notes: 1. All brackets are radial to vessel unless specified otherwise.
2. The edge of single brackets are 25mm from OD of pipe; the edge of double
brackets are 50mm from the OD of pipe. Insulation is trimmed to clear the
bracket.
3 Grouped, 3” & smaller , process or utility lines may be supported from one “utility”
bracket. The “utility” bracket extends to back of pipe, with U-bolts & shear lugs by
PMECH. Maximum from vessel shell to back of pipe, Y=610mm. Load limits of
22249n (Total VL and 8.470 KNm
(moment = VL x Y) apply.
13.2.4B Support Brackets On Cold Insulated Lines
Cold insulation is generally 69ºF (20ºC) and below. Consult project "P" Class Summary for job-
Specify: 1. Single or double cold bracket by vessels (See Fig. 1 on page 7).
2. TOS Elevation.
3. Magnitude and source(i.e.; oper, test, etc) of vertical load.-
4. Sketch of Bracket or model appropriate element in PDS.
(Note: Std brkt overhang is 230mm;if more overhang is required, it must be
specified).
5. Dimension "S", if a spring or hanger is required. In PDS, locate brackets per “S”
dimension.
6. Type of support, if “S” has been specified; i.e. , base, Spring or rod hanger. In
PDS, also model the spring or rod hanger.
7. Nominal OD of Insulation.
Notes: 1. All brackets are radial to vessel, unless specified otherwise.
2. Insulation thickness in nomenclature is nominal.
The edge of single brackets are 25mm from the OD of insulation; the edge of
double brackets are 50mm. Insulation is not trimmed on cold insulated lines.
64
DOUBLE
BRACKE
TS
SINGLE
BRACK
ETS
13.2.5 PIPING GUIDE BRACKETS

All of the piping guide brackets attached to the vessel are designed and specified by the Vessel
Mechanical Group. The guide bracket design criteria and elevation is calculated by Piping
Mechanical when performing the stress calculations for the piping. The piping guide bracket is
called for on the Planning Study Drawings or on Vessel layout drawings as determined by Vessel
Mechanicals requirements. The Vessel Mechanical Standard Pipe Guide Brackets should be
used unless the design requirements exceed the standard capability. The guide elevation
required shall be noted along with the standard pipe guide notation. If the standard guide
brackets capability is exceeded then a special guide bracket shall be called for defining the
loading, the elevation, any special dimensions and any special steel size requirements.
65
Guide bracket elevations should be defined based on the "VERTICAL GUIDE SPACING TABLE"
shown in Section 13.30.7. The maximum spacing is based on the wind pressure, data given in
job documents, and the outside of insulation diameter.
The elevation for the first guide down from the support bracket should be defined using one half
of the calculated vertical spacing dimension. The lowest guide must remain at approximately one
half of this spacing dimension above the piping as it turns out (see Section 13.30.7). All other
guides can be located at elevations based on an average spacing which will not exceed the
maximum allowed. In setting the guide elevations, be sure to check for interferences between
the guide clips attached to the vessel and items such as nozzles, nozzle reinforcing pads,
platform clips and known weld seams. In the PDS model, the size, location and orientation of the
brackets, and communicate this data to Vessel Mechanical. * Consult with vessel Mechanical for
typical clip dimensions.
All piping guides from vertical vessels must be checked during the detail design phase of the job.
This check includes verification that the piping guide bracket requested on the Planning Study
Drawing has been designed, will be supplied, and meets the requirements. Verification that the
piping guide bracket was merely called for on a Planning Study Drawing is not adequate.
Piping guide bracket comments on vessels shall contain the following information:
13.2.5A Guide Brackets On Hot Insulated Lines
(Hot insulation is generally 70 OF (21OC) and above. Consult project "P" Class Summary for job-
specific requirements. For uninsulated lines designed for below 32 OF consult job leader..
Specify: 1. Guide bracket by vessels (They supply U-bolts) or “Box” guide by vessel
Mechanical (See note 1).
2. Top of steel elevation (TOS).
3. Magnitude, direction and source of horizontal load,
(i.e.; wind, thermal, etc).
4. Sketch of guide at the vessel or model appropriate element in PDS
(See note 1).
Notes: 1. Vessels will supply a "Box" guide if the pipe OD is greater than 24", or
based on horizontal load and distance from shell per figure 2 on page 9.
2. Vessels will supply 3mm guide clearance. Specify a larger gap, if required.
3. Small process or utility lines may be guided from one bracket. Limit = Four
(4) 3" line, maximum line size is 3".
66
SPECIAL DESIGN
GUIDE
BRACKET
STANDARD NOT
“BOX” E2
TYPE GUIDE NOT
BRACKET E1
(MAX. 60”
PIPE SIZE)
(NOTE 4)
STANDARD U-BOLT
TYPE
GUIDE BRACKET
(MAX. 24” PIPE)
(NOTE 3)
Notes:
1. Maximum 22593 Nm (200 Inch-kip) Moment = HL x LC.
2. Maximum 33889 Nm (300 Inch-kip) Moment = HL x LC.
3. For pipe sizes greater than 24” in this range, a “box” guide is required.
4. For pipe sizes greater than 60” in this range, a special design guide bracket is required.
67
13.2.5B Guide Brackets On Cold Insulated Lines
Cold insulation is generally 69OF (20OC) and below. Consult project "P" Class Summary for job-
Specify: 1. Cold guide bracket by vessels (They supply U-bolts.) or “Box” guide by
Vessel Mechanical (See Note 2).
2. TOS elevation
3. Magnitude, direction and source (i.e.; wind, thermal, etc) of horizontal load.
4. Actual OD of bearing plate . Use Support Detail CS3 (Refer to Section ??? for
O.D.). For pipe size above 24", consult the Job leader.
5. Sketch of Guide at the vessel or model appropriate element in PDS (See
Note 2)
Notes: 1. Vessels will supply 3mm guide clearance, unless otherwise noted.
2. Vessels will supply a "Box guide if OD of bearing plate is greater than 24", or
based on horizontal load and distance from shell per Figure 2 on
page 9.
13.2.6 PIPE SUPPORT FROM PLATFORMS
In general only the utility lines are supported or guided from the vessel’s platforms. In these
cases the loading and guiding forces and moments should be noted on the Planning Study
Drawing or Vessel layout sketches PDS model.
13.2.7 NOZZLE LOADS (GENERAL)
The nozzle loading is mostly generated by the thermal and wind load cases. The pipe supports
are located very close to the vessel nozzles and designed to carry the full piping weight loading.
The guide system is designed to carry the horizontal weight, thermal and wind forces and
negate the horizontal moments. With a normally supported and guided piping layout the nozzle
loading will be acceptable. With large diameter pipe or special piping layouts the nozzle loading
should be issued to Vessel Mechanical for nozzle design.
13.2.8 TYPICAL PLANNING COMMENTS
The typical planning comments for vertical vessels should include the standard guide or support
designation, its elevation, any special dimensions and any special steel requirements. Examples
of typical planning comments are shown on the next two pages.
68
TYPICAL PLANNING COMMENTS FOR VERTICAL

VESSELS
EMBED Word.Picture.8
SMALL
SPECIAL BRKT. BY O.D.
TOWER (O.D. < 1.22m) – GROUPED
LINES SUPPORT BRKT. BY VESSELS
VESSELS
TOS EL. . . TOS EL. .
V.L. = . 1.5 K . .
V.L. = .
.
UTILITY
B LINES
Y
P
I
P 460 Minimum
I
N
0.5K
G
1.0K
PIPE O.D. +
PIPE O.D. + PLAN ABOVE EL. . 150mm
150mm . 2
2
UTILITY
LINES
GUIDE BRKT. BY
VESSELS
TOS EL. .
NOTE:-
K = 4450N .
(1000LB) H.L. = .
.
SPECIAL BRKT. BY
VESSELS
TOS .E.L. .
.
V.L. = .
0.8K .
0.8K H.L. = . 0.4K
PIPE
. O.D. +
150mm
GUIDE BRKT. PIPE
BY O.D. +PLAN E.L. . . TO EL. .2 SUPPORT BRKT. BY
VESSEL 150mm . VESSELS
TOS EL. . 2 TOS EL. .
. .
H.L. = . V.L. = .
TYPICAL PLANNING COMMENT FOR VERTICAL VESSELS
(With outside diameter larger than 1.22m)
69
SUPORT BRKT. BY
EMBED Word.Picture.8 VESSELS
UTILITY LINES TOS EL. .
.
UTILITY LINES
GUIDE BRKT. BY
VESSELS
TOS EL.
. .
H.L. = COLD GUIDE BRKT. BY
VESSEL
TOS EL. .
.
H.L. = .
(THERMAL) .
H.L. = . (WIND)
“S .
” “S
” COLD DOUBLE BRKT. BY
O.D. BEARING PLATE =
VESSELS
DOUBLE BRKT. BY TOS464mm
EL. .
VESSELS .
TOS EL. . TOTAL V.L. = .
. .
TOTAL V.L. = .
. INSUL. O.D. = 711mm
“S” DIM. = .
.
SPRING HANGERS BY P.
MECH.
70
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
13.3.1 GENERAL STATEMENT
This manual subject provides design information concerning the supporting of all piping
connected to horizontal vessel nozzles.
The structural design of supports and the structures are provided by Vessel Mechanical, or Civil
Engineering or Piping Mechanical depending upon the type of support. The location and the
design criteria are calculated by Piping Mechanical to achieve the proper pipe stress analysis,
pipe flexibility and vessel nozzle loading. Locations are indicated on the Piping Planning
Drawings, the Vessel Layout Drawings or PDS model, as appropriate.
13.3.2 VESSEL EXPANSION
The axial or horizontal thermal expansion of the vessel shell is to be based on the design
temperature of the largest inlet piping. The thermal expansion movements of vessel nozzles
must be calculated in order to accurately analyze the connecting piping's flexibility and stress
analysis. It is Piping Mechanicalls responsibility to determine which end of the vessel must be
anchored and indicate it on the Piping Planning Drawings. The horizontal vessel anchor is
normally located so that the majority of the associated piping or any critical piping has thermal
expansion which will be off set by the vessels expansion. Based on this criteria the horizontal
vessel support closest to a yard rack will normally be the end to be anchored.
13.3.3 PIPING SUPPORT BRACKETS
The horizontal vessel piping supports can be attached to the vessel shell, the vessel supporting
structure or at grade. The piping support brackets attaching to the vessel shell are designed and
specified by Vessel Mechanical. The piping support structures connecting to the vessel support
are designed and specified by Civil Engineering. The piping support tees or structures from
grade will be designed by Piping Mechanical as a special pipe support or by Civil Engineering .
The piping dropping down near grade such as control station piping should be supported by
Piping Mechanical utilizing standard pipe supports. The location and design criteria of pipe
supports are calculated by Piping Mechanical when performing the piping stress and flexibility
calculations and indicated on the Piping Planning Drawings, the Vessel Layout Drawings or in
the PDS model, as appropriate.
The best method of supporting piping is from grade utilizing the standard piping supports, tee
posts or structural framing. When the elevation of the vessel is too high for using pipe support
structures from grade or when the differential settlement between the vessel support foundations
and the pipe support foundations becomes a problem, then utilizing tee posts or structural
framing attached to the vessel supports becomes the best solution. Utilizing piping supports
attached to the vessel shell should be kept to a minimum due to cost and schedule impact to
Vessel Mechanical.
13.3.4 PIPE SUPPORTS FROM THE PLATFORMS
The location and loading of supports transmitting loads in excess of 2225N (500lb) on a platform
should be highlighted on the Planning Study Drawings or Vessel Layout Sketches.'
71
13.3.5 NOZZLE LOADS (GENERAL)
The nozzle loading is generated by thermal, weight and wind and other load cases. With large
diameter pipe or special piping layouts the nozzle loading should be issued to Vessel Mechanical
as soon as possible for nozzle design.
13.3.9 TYPICAL PLANNING COMMENTS
The typical planning comments for horizontal vessels should include the vessel anchor location,
the location and design criteria of piping support structures and the location and loading for any
Piping Mechanical standard pipe supports. Typical planning comments are shown on the next
page.
72
HORIZONTAL VESSELS
GUIDE FROM
PLATFORM BY
VESSEL MECHANICAL
TOS EL 37.18m
H.L. = .
.
LINE NO., LOCATION &
COORDINATES BY PIPING
PI
C
SUPPORT ON
PLATFORM BY
PIPING MECHANICAL
TOS EL = 37.18m 0.3K
V.L. = 0.5 K @ EA. PT. NOTE:- (TYP)
0.2K
(TYP) 1K = 1000LB = 4450N
0.5K
(TYP)
VESSEL MECHANICAL TO
EXTEND
PLATFORM STEEL
TOS EL. 37.18m
TOTAL V.L. = . 1.0K
.
TYPICAL 2 PLACES
6”
LINE NO. LOCATION &
COORDINATES BY
PIPING
73
13.4.0 STORAGE TANKS
13.4.1 Pipe Layout considerations
The following items should be considered in pipe stress analysis

In addition to the basic design conditions such as pressure and temperature range:-
a) Tank thermal expansion / contraction vertical and radial.

b) Tank expansion due to hydrostatic / pressure loads radial and possibly vertically.
c) Settlement.
d) Load limits for tank nozzles. May require reference to manufacturer, or MWKL
may impose loads to be specified to the manufacturer.
Difficulties maybe encountered when designing pipe systems to incorporate the

above considerations, especially with settlement, and the use of spring supports for
the adjacent pipe supports, expansion joints or bellows units may need to be
considered.
With expansion joint and bellows, the effects of internal pressure thrust forces must
be considered. Restrainer or control rods maybe necessary, in which case the
expansion joint should be arranged to absorb movements by “shear” as the control
rod system will tend to remove any axial flexibility.
Some long vertical lines leading to tank connections, may require supports to be
attached to the tank. Supports for pipe weight may require spring supports to
absorb the differential expansion between the tank and the pipe. For guide
positions see sections 13.26.6 and 13.26.7.
74
13.12.1 CODES
Steam turbines are considered to be sensitive equipment and therefore require a mandatory
computer investigation of all the inlet, extraction and exhaust lines connected to them in order to
determine the actual forces and moments.
It is M.W. Kellogg’s practice to use NEMA SM-23, 1997 paragraph 23-8.4.6 to determine the
allowable forces and moments, however it should be noted that the resolving point for combined
forces and moments at the time of writing this document is in contention and advice from the
turbine manufacturer maybe required (see attachment “A” at end of this document).
The forces and moments on nozzles are calculated using the modulus of elasticity for the
operating condition(s).
NEMA SM-23, 1997 Paragraph 23-8.4.6
SM 23-8.4.6 ALLOWABLE FORCES AND MOMENTS ON MECHANICAL DRIVE STEAM
TURBINES
The forces and moments acting on mechanical-drive steam turbines due to the steam inlet,
extraction and exhaust connections are limited by the following rules :
1. The total resultant force and total resultant moment imposed on the turbine at any connection
must not exceed the following:
FR – Resultant force (pounds), including pressure forces where unrestrained

expansion joints are used at the connection except on vertical exhausts covered
under item 3 and is equal to:-
MR – Resultant moment (pound-feet) = .
De - Pipe size of the connection (I.P.S) in inches up to 8 inches in

diameter. For sizes greater than this, use a value of D equal to (16
+ I.P.S)/3 inches.
2. The combined resultants of the forces and moments of the inlet, extraction and exhaust
connections, resolved at the centrelines of the exhaust connection must not exceed the
following two conditions:
a. These resultants must not exceed:
75
Fc – combined resultant of inlet, extraction and exhaust forces, pounds.

Mc – combined resultant of inlet, extraction and exhaust moments and moments resulting
from forces, pound – feet.
Dc – Diameter ( in inches ) of a circular opening equal to the total areas of the inlet,
extraction and exhaust openings up to a value of 9 inches in diameter. For values
beyond this use a value of Dc equal to (18 + Equivalent Diameter) / 3 inches.
b. The components of these resultants shall not exceed :

FY = 125 Dc MY = 125 Dc
FZ = 100Dc MZ = 125 Dc
FX = 50 Dc MX = 250 Dc
FY – Vertical component of Fc.

FZ – Horizontal component of Fc at right angles to turbine shaft.
FX – Horizontal component of Fc parallel to turbine shaft.
MX – Component of Mc in about the horizontal axis parallel to the turbine shaft.
MY – Component of Mc about the vertical axis.
MZ – Component of Mc about the horizontal axis at right angles to the turbine shaft.
For Forces in Newton and Moments in Newton-metres the above equations are as follows: -
Where: -
and
De is still in inches as previously defined.
Dc is as defined previously (inches).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTES
a) These loads (forces and moments) are calculated using the modulus of elasticity
for the operating condition.
b) Before final release of a piece of equipment, forces and moments must be combined and
resolved per code. (ie: suction, discharge and extraction nozzle, if used.)
76
Component forces (in Newtons) and moments (in Newton-metres) shall not exceed the following:
FY = 556 Dc MY = 169.47 Dc
FZ = 444.8Dc MZ = 169.47 Dc
FX = 222.4 Dc MX = 338.9 Dc
VERTICAL
Y+ RIGHT ANGLE TO
TURBINE SHAFT
Fy
My
Fx
PARALLEL
X+ TO
Mz Mx TURBINE SHAFT
Fz
Z+
3. For installation of turbines with a vertical exhaust and an unrestrained expansion

joint at the exhaust, an additional amount of force caused by pressure loading is
allowed. (The additional force referred to is perpendicular to the face of the exhaust
flange and central. ) For this type of application, calculate the vertical force
component on the exhaust connection, excluding pressure loading. Use this vertical
force component on the exhaust connection in making calculations outlined in items
I and 2.
The force caused by the pressure loading on the exhaust is allowed in addition to the
values established by the foregoing up to a maximum value of vertical force (pounds)
on the exhaust connection (including pressure loading) of 15 1/2 times the exhaust area
(square inches).
For force in Newtons, this additional force converts to: -

15.5 x (exhaust area inches) x 4.45
4. These values of allowable force and moment pertain to the turbine structure only.
They do not pertain to the forces and moments in the connecting piping, flange and
flange bolting which should not exceed the allowable stress as defined by
applicable codes and regulatory-bodies.
77
Authorized Engineering Information 11-14-1985
Attachment “A”
From: Michael Vasse
Sent: 03 February 2000 15:56
Subject: NEMA and Caesar II
See Below, Report from CAODE
NEMA SM 23 Changes
Prior to CAESAR II Version 4.10 (February 1999) the forces and moments on turbines were resolved at the exhaust
nozzle. CAESAR II requested distances of the connection points relative to this exhaust nozzle connection.
One of our customers disagreed with the (software&s) point of resolution of forces and moments. We referenced the
NEMA code and it was not clear which point should be the base point for resolving the forces and moments. Section
8.4.6.2 states "The combined resultants of the forces and moments on the inlet, extraction, and exhaust
connections, resolved at the centrelines of the exhaust connection should not exceed the values per Limit 2." The
wording is unclear: Centrelines NOT centreline (one of the centrelines is the exhaust connection centreline).
Moreover, the example that NEMA SM 23 provides is unclear about the resolution of the forces and moments. When
the summation is performed the moment arms are all zero, implying that all connections have zero distance from the
point of resolution.
NEMA was contacted for clarification and it was brought to our attention that the moments should NOT be resolved
about the exhaust nozzle. We received a copy of the letter of the response to our customer. The letter stated the
following:
"The forces and moment on the steam turbine connections are to be resolved about the intersection of the centreline
of the turbine exhaust and the centreline of the turbine shaft." - Douglas Martin , NEMA Section 8 Chairman - Murray
Turbo Machinery.
Before making the changes for NEMA SM 23, now effective in CAESAR II Version 4.10 and later, COADE contacted
Mr. Martin to verify the information he had provided. Indeed he verified the information and indicated that this line
has been missing from the code. CAESAR II Version 4.10 now asks for distances relative to the intersection point
of the centreline of the exhaust nozzle and the turbine shaft. When entering the distances described, the forces and
moment on the steam turbine connections are resolved at the intersection of the centreline of the exhaust nozzle and
the centreline of the turbine shaft.
Currently the NEMA SM 23 committee is reviewing these issues in the hope of providing a clearer point of resolution
and a better example. In the meantime, CAESAR II user's may resolve forces and moments at the intersection point
or at the exhaust connection by simply entering the appropriate distances from the connections to the selected
force/moment resolution point.
There are two schools of thought on where combined forces and moments should be resolved.
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the
exhaust nozzle connection, enter the distance from the exhaust nozzle to each connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centreline and the equipment shaft centreline. In order to resolve
the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust nozzle and the shaft centrelines, enter the
distance from the intersection point to each connection.
Regards
Mike Vasse
Chief Piping Engineer
020 8872 6351
E-mail: michael.vasse@mwkl.co.uk
78
13.14.1 Centrifugal Pumps
All centrifugal pumps shall be considered to be API specification pumps unless

project specifications indicate otherwise. Allowable nozzle reactions for non API 610
pumps shall be checked according to the appropriate standard or vendors
information. Nozzle reactions for API 610 pumps shall conform to the following:-
API 610 Paragraph 2.4:-
2.4 External Nozzle Forces and Moments
2.4 .1 Steel and alloy steel horizontal pumps, and their baseplates, and vertically
suspended pumps shall be designed for satisfactory performance when subjected to
the forces and moments in Table 2- 1 A (2- 1 B). For horizontal pumps, two effects of
nozzle loads are considered: Distortion of the pump casing (see 2.2.8) and
misalignment of the pump and driver shafts (see 3.3.5).
2.4.2 Allowable forces and moments for vertical in-line pumps shall be twice the values in
Table 2-1A (2-1B) for side nozzles.
2.4.3 For pump casings constructed of materials other than steel or alloy steel
or for pumps with nozzles larger than 16 NPS, the vendor shall submit
allowable nozzle loads corresponding to the format in Table 2- 1 A (2- 1 B).
2.4.4 The co-ordinate system(s) shown in Figures 2-2 through 2-6 shall be used to apply
the forces and moments in Table 2-1 A (2- 1 B)
Note: The co-ordinate systems have changed since the 7th Edition of this standard.
2.4.5 Appendix F defines the method used by the piping designer to determine allowable
piping loads.
79
From API STD 610 - 1995
Table 2-1A-Nozzle Loadings (Si Units)

Note: Each value shown below indicates a range from minus that value to plus that value; for example 710 Indicates a range
from –710 to +710.
Nominal Size of Flange (NPS)

Force/Moment 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Each Top Nozzle
FX 710 1070 1420 2490 3780 5340 6670 7120 8450
FY 580 890 1160 2050 3110 4450 5340 5780 6670
FZ 890 1330 1780 3110 4890 6670 8000 8900 10230
FR 1280 1930 2560 4480 6920 9630 11700 12780 14850
Each Side Nozzle
FX 710 1070 1420 2490 3780 5340 6670 7120 8450
FY 890 1330 1780 3110 4890 6670 8000 8900 10230
FZ 580 890 1160 2050 3110 4450 5340 5780 6670
FR 1280 1930 2560 4480 6920 9630 11700 12780 14850
Each End Nozzle
FX 890 1330 1780 3110 4890 6670 8000 8900 10230
FY 710 1070 1420 2490 3780 5340 6670 7120 8450
FZ 580 890 1160 2050 3110 4450 5340 5780 6670
FR 1280 1930 2560 4480 6920 9630 11700 12780 14850
Each Nozzle
MX 460 950 1330 2300 3530 5020 6100 6370 7320
MY 230 470 680 1180 1760 2440 2980 3120 3660
MZ 350 720 1000 1760 2580 3800 4610 4750 5420
MR 620 1280 1800 3130 4710 6750 8210 8540 9820
Note 1: F = force in Newtons; Moment in Newton metres; R=resultant. See Figures 2-2 - 2-6 for orientation of nozzle loads (X, Y, and Z).
Note 2: Coordinate system has been changed from API Standard 610,7th Edition, convention to ISO 1503 convention.
Table 2-1 B-Nozzle Loadings (U.S. Units)

Note: Each value shown below indicates a range from minus that value to plus that value; for example l60 indicates a range from
-160 to +160.
Nominal Size of Flange (NPS)

Force/Moment 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Each Top Nozzle
FX 160 240 320 560 850 1200 1500 1600 1900
FY 130 200 260 460 700 1000 1200 1300 1500
FZ 200 300 400 700 1100 1500 1800 2000 2300
FR 290 430 570 1010 1560 2200 2600 2900 3300
Each Side Nozzle
FX 160 240 320 560 850 1200 1500 1600 1900
FY 200 300 400 700 1100 1500 1800 2000 2300
FZ 130 200 260 460 700 1000 1200 1300 1500
FR 290 430 570 1010 1560 2200 2600 2900 3300
Each End Nozzle
FX 200 300 400 700 1100 1500 1800 2000 2300
FY 160 240 320 560 850 1200 1500 1600 1900
FZ 130 200 260 460 700 1000 1200 1300 1500
FR 290 430 570 1010 1560 2200 2600 2900 3300
Each Nozzle
MX 340 700 980 1700 2600 3700 4500 4700 5400
MY 170 350 500 870 1300 1800 2200 2300 2700
MZ 260 530 740 1300 1900 2800 3400 3500 4000
MR 460 950 1330 2310 3500 5000 6100 6300 7200
Note 1: F = force in pounds; M = moment in foot-pounds; R =resultant. See Figures 2-2 - 2-6 for orientation of nozzle loads (X, Y, and Z).
Note 2: Coordinate system has been changed from API Standard 610,7th Edition, convention to ISO 1503 convention.
80
From API 610 - 1995
EMBED Word.Picture.8 EMBED Word.Picture.8
From API 610 - 1995
Figure 2-4 – Coordinate System

For the Forces and Moments
in Table 2.1A (2.1B)
Horizontal Pumps with Side Suction and 81
Side Discharge Nozzles
From API 610 - 1995
Figure 2-5 – Coordinate System for

The Forces and Moments in Table 2.1A (2.1B)
Horizontal Pumps with End Suction
and Top Discharge Nozzles
82
83
From API 610 - 1995
Figure 2-6 – Coordinate System for the

Forces and Moments in Table 2-1A (2.1B)
Horizontal Pumps with Top Nozzles
84
From API STD 610 1995
APPENDIX F-CRITERIA FOR PIPING DESIGN
F.1 Horizontal Pumps
F.1.1 Acceptable piping configurations should not cause excessive misalignment between the
pump and driver. Piping configurations that produce component nozzle loads lying within the
ranges specified in Table 2. 1 A (2. 1 B) will limit casing distortion to one half the pump vendor's
design criterion (see 2.2.8) and will ensure pump shaft displacement of less than 250 μm (0.010
in.).
F.1.2 Piping configurations that produce loads outside the ranges specified in Table 2.1 A (2. 1 B)
are also acceptable without consultation with the pump vendor if the conditions specified in F.
1.2.1 through F. 1.2.3 are satisfied. Satisfying these conditions will ensure that any pump casing
distortion will be within the vendors design criteria (see 2.2.8) and that the displacement of the
pump shaft will be less than 380 μm (0.015 in. ).
Note: This is a criterion for piping design only.
F.I.2.1 The individual component forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle flange shall
not exceed the range specified in Table 2. 1A (2. 1 B) by a factor of more than 2.
F.1.2.2 The resultant applied force (FRSA, FRDA,) and the resultant applied moment (MRSA,
MRDA) acting on each pump nozzle flange shall satisfy the appropriate interaction equation
(Equations F- I and F-2).
(FRSA / 1.5FRST2) + (.MRSA / 1.5MRST2) <2 (F- 1)

(FRDA / 1.5FRDT2) + (MRDA / 1.5MRDT2) <2 (F-2)
F.1.2.3 The applied component forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle flange must be
translated to the center of the pump. The magnitude of the resultant applied force (FRCA), the
resultant applied moment (MRCA), and the applied moment shall be limited by Equations F-3, F-
4, and F5. (The sign convention shown in Figures 2.2-2.6 and the right hand rule should be used
in evaluating these equations.)
FRCA < 1.5(FRST2 + FRDT2) (F-3)
MYCA < 2.0(MYST2 + MYDT2) (F-4)
MRCA < 1.5(MRST2 + MRDT2) (F-5)
85
Where:
FRCA = [(FXCA)2 + (FYCA)2 + (FZCA)2]0.5
FXCA = FXSA + FXDA
FYCA = FYSA + FYDA
FZCA = FZSA + FZDA
MRCA = [(MXCA)2 + (MYCA ) 2 + (MZCA) 2]0.5
MXCA = MXSA + MXDA - [(FYSA) (zS) + (FYDA)(z D)- (FZSA) (yS) - (FZDA) (yD)l / 1000
MYCA = MYSA + MYDA + [(FXSA ) (zS) +(FXDA)(zD) - (FZSA )(XS) - (FZDA ) (xD)]/ I000
MZCA = MZSA + MZDA - [(FXSA) (yS) + (FXDA )(yD)- (FYSA) (xS) - (FYDA) (xD)]/ 1000
Note: When U.S. units are used, the constant 1000 must be changed to
12. This constant is the conversion factor to change millimetres to metres or inches to feet.
F.1.3 Piping configurations that produce loads greater than those allowed in F. 1.2 shall be
mutually approved by the purchaser and the vendor.
F.2 Vertical In-Line Pumps
Vertical in-line pumps that are supported only by the attached piping may be subjected to
component piping loads that are more than double the values shown in Table 2. ]A (2. 1 B) if
these loads do not cause a principal stress greater than 41 MPa (5950 psi) in either nozzle. For
calculation purposes, the section properties of the pump nozzles shall be based on Schedule 40
pipe whose nominal size is equal to that of the appropriate pump nozzle. Equations F-6A (F-6B),
F-7A (F-7B), and F-8A (F-8B) can be used to evaluate principal stress, longitudinal stress, and
shear stress, respectively, in the nozzles.
P= (σ/2) + (σ 2/ 4 + τ2)0.5 <41 (F-6A)
σ = [1.27 FY /(DO2 - DI2)]+ [ 1.02 x 104Do(MX2 + MZ2)0.5 ]/ (Do4 - DI4) (F-7A)
τ = [1.27(FX2 + FZ2)0.5] / (Do2 - DI2)+ [0.51 x 104Do (MY)]/ (Do4 - DI4) (F-8A)
For U.S. units, the following equations apply:
P= (σ/2) + (σ 2/ 4 + τ2)0.5 <5950 (F-6B)
σ = [1.27 FY /(DO2 - DI2)]+ [ 122Do(MX2 + MZ2)0.5 ]/ (Do4 - DI4) (F-7B)
τ = [1.27(FX2 + FZ2)0.5] / (Do2 - DI2)+ [61Do (MY)]/ (Do4 - DI4) (F-8B)
Note: -FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY and MZ represent the applied loads acting on the suction or
discharge nozzles; thus, suffixes SA and DA have been omitted to simplify the equations.
86
The sign of FY is positive if the load puts the nozzle in tension; the sign is negative if the
load puts the nozzle in compression. One must refer to Figure 2.2 and the applied nozzle
loads to determine whether the nozzle is in tension or compression. The absolute value
of MY should be used in Equation F-8A (F-8B).
F.3 Nomenclature
The following definitions apply to the sample problems in F-4:
C = center of the pump. For pump types OH2 and BB2 with two support pedestals,
the center is defined by the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a
vertical plane passing through the centre of the two pedestals (see Figures 2.5
and 2.6). For pump types BB I, BB3, BB4 and BB5 with four support pedestals,
the centre is defined by the intersection of the pump shaft centreline and a
vertical plane passing midway between the four pedestals (see Figure 2-4).
D = discharge nozzle.
D = inside diameter of Schedule 40 pipe whose nominal size is equal to that of the
pump nozzle in question, in mm (in.).
Do = outside diameter of Schedule 40 pipe whose nominal size is equal to that of The
pump nozzle in question, in mm (in.).
F = force, in N (lbs).
FR = resultant force. (FRSA and FRDA are calculated by the square root of the sum of
the squares method using the applied component forces acting on the nozzle
flange. FRST2and FRDT2 are extracted from Table 2. IA (2.1 B), using the
appropriate nozzle size.)
M = moment, in Nm (ft-lb).
MR = resultant moment. (MRS, and MRD, are calculated by the square root of the
squares method using the applied component moments acting on the nozzle
flange. MRST2and MRDT2 are extracted from Table 2.1 A (2.1 B) using the
appropriate nozzle size.)
P = principle stress, in MPa (psi).
S = suction nozzle.
x, y, z = location coordinates of the nozzle flanges with respect to the center of the
pump, in mm (in.).
X, Y, Z = direction of the loads (see Figures 2.2-2.6).
σ = longitudinal stress, in MPa (psi).
τ = shear stress, in MPa (psi).
Subscript A = applied loads.
Subscript T2 = loads extracted from Table 2- 1 A (2- 1 B).
87
From API 610 - 1995
F-4 Sample Problems
F.4.1 EXAMPLE IA (S.I. UNITS)

F.4.1.1 Problem
For an overhung end suction process pump, the nozzle sizes and location coordinates are as
given in Table F- IA. The applied nozzle loadings are as given in Table F-2A. The problem is to
determine whether the conditions specified in E 1.2. 1, F. 1.2.2, and F. 1.2.3 are satisfied.
F.4.1.2 Solution
F.4.1.2.1 A check of condition F.I.2.l is as follows:
For the 10NPS end suction nozzle,
| FXSA / FXST2 | = |+12,900 / 6670 | = 1.93 < 2.00

| FYSA / FYST2 | = |0 / 5340 | = 0 < 2.00
| FZSA / FZST2 | = | -8852 / 4450 | = 1.99 < 2.00
|MXSA / MXST2 |= |-1 356 / 5020 | = 0.27 < 2.00
I MYSA / MYST2 |=|-5017 / 2440 | = 2.06 > 2.00
I MZSA / MZST2 |= |-7458 / 3800 | = 1.96 < 2.00
Since MYSA exceeds the specified in Table 2. 1 A by more than a factor of 2, it is not satisfactory.
Assume that MYSA can be reduced to -4879. Then,
I MYSA / MYST2I = |-4879 / 2440| = 1.9996 < 2.00
For the 8NPS top discharge nozzle,
|FXDA /FXDT2 I = |+7117 / 3780| = 1.88 < 2.00

|FYDA / FYDT2| = | -445 / 3110| = 0.14 < 2.00
IFZDA / FZOT2| = |+8674 / 4890| = l.77 < 2.00
|MXDA / MXDT2| = |+678 / 3530| = 0.19 < 2.00
|MYDA / MYDT2|= |-3390 / 1760| = 1.93 < 2.00
|MZDA / MZDT2| = |-4882 / 2580| = 1.89 < 2.00
Provided that MYSAcan be reduced to -4879, the applied piping loads acting on each nozzle
satisfy the condition specified in F. 1.2.1.
F.4.1.2.2 A check of condition F. 1.2.2 is as follows:
For the suction nozzle, FRSA and MRSA are determined using the square root of the sum of the
squares method:
88
Table F-lA-Nozzle Sizes and Location

Coordinates for Example 1 A
Nozzle Size x y z
mm (mm) (mm) (mm)
Suction 10NPS +267 0 0
Discharge 8NPS 0 -311 +381
Table F-2A-Applied Nozzle Loadings
for Example 1
Force Value Moment Value
(newtons) (newton meters)
Suction
FXSA =12900 MXSA -1356
FYSA 0 MYSA -5017a
FZSA -8852 MZSA -7458
Discharge
FXDA +7117 MXDA +678
FYDA -445 MYDA -3390
FZDA +8674 MZDA -4882
FRSA = [(FXSA )2 + (FYSA)2 + (FZSA)2] 0.5

= [(+12,900)2 + (0)2 + (-8852)2] 0.5 = 15645
MRSA = [(MXSA )2 + (MYSA)2 + (MZSA)2] 0.5
= [(-1356)2 + (-4879)2 + (-7458)2] 0.5 = 9015
Referring to Equation F-1
(FRSA /1.5 FRST2) + (MRSA /1.5 MRST2) ≤ 2
15645/[1.5(9780)] + 9015/[1.5(6750)] ≤ 2
1.96< 2
For the discharge nozzle, FRDA and MRDA are dteremined by the same method used to find
FRSA and MRSA :
FRDA = [(FXDA )2 + (FYDA)2 + (FZDA)2] 0.5

= [(+7117)2 + (-445)2 + (-8674)2] 0.5 = 11229
MRDA = [(MXDA )2 + (MYDA)2 + (MZDA)2] 0.5
= [(-678)2 + (-3390)2 + (-4882)2] 0.5 = 5982
(FRDA /1.5 FRDT2) + (MRDA /1.5 MRDT2) ≤ 2
11229/[1.5(6920)] + 5982/[1.5(4710)] ≤ 2
89
1.93< 2
The loads acting on each nozzle satisfy the appropriate interaction equation, so the condition
specified in F1.2.2 is satisfied.
F-4.1.2.3 A check of condition F. 1.2.3 is as follows:
To check this condition, the applied component forces and moments are translated and resolved
to the center of the pump. FRCA is determined as follows (see F. 1.2.3):
Thus, all of the requirements of F.1.2.3 have been satisfied.
FXC A = FXS A + FXD A

FYC A = FYS A + FYD A
FZC A = FZS A + FZD A
FRCA = [(FXCA )2 + (FYCA)2 + (FZCA)2] 0.5
FXC A = (+12900) + (+7117) = +20017
FYC A = (0) + (-445) = -445
FZC A = [(-8852 + (+8674) = -178
FRCA = [(+20017)2 + (-445)2 + (-178)2] 0.5 = 20023

Referring to equation F-3
FRCA <1.5(FRST2 + FRDT2)

20023<1.5(9780 +6920)
20023<25050
MYCA is determined as follows (see F.1.2.3)

MYCA = MYSA + MYDA + [(FXSA ) (zS) +(FXDA)(zD) - (FZSA )(XS) - (FZDA ) (xD)]/ I000
= (-4879) + (3390) + [(+12900)(0.00) +(+7117(+381) – (-8852)(+267)
– (8674)(0.00)]/1000 = -3194
MYCA < 2.0 (MYCT2 + MYCT2)
-3194< 2.0 (2440 + 1760)
-3194< 8400
MYCA is dtermined as follows (see F.1.2.3):
MXCA = MXSA + MXDA - [(FYSA) (zS) + (FYDA)(z D)- (FZSA) (yS) - (FZDA) (yD)l / 1000
MYCA = MYSA + MYDA + [(FXSA ) (zS) +(FXDA)(zD) - (FZSA )(xS) - (FZDA ) (xD)]/ I000
MZCA = MZSA + MZDA - [(FXSA) (yS) + (FXDA )(yD)- (FYSA) (xS) - (FYDA) (xD)]/ 1000
90
MRCA = [F(MXDA )2 + (MYDA)2 + (MZDA)2] 0.5

MXCA = (-1356) + (+678) – [(0)(0.00) + (-445)(+381)-(-8852)(0.00) – (+8674)(-311)]/1000
MYCA = -3194 (see previous calaculation)
MZCA = (-7458) + (-4882) – [(+12900)(0.00) + (+7117)(-311)- (0((+267)
- (-445)(0.00)]/1000
= -10127
MRCA = [(-3206)2 + (-3194)2 + (-10127)2] 0.5 = 11092
MRCA < 1.5(MRST2 + MRDT2)
11092 < 1.5(6750 + 4710)
11092 < 17190
Thus, all off the requirements of F.1.2.3 have been satisfied.
91
F.4.2 Example 2A (S.I. UNITS)
F.4.2.1 Problem
For an 80 x 100 178 vertical-in-line pump, the proposed applied nozzle loadings are as given in
table F-3A. By inspection, FZS,, MZS,, and MXD, are greater than two times the values shown in
Table 2. 1 A. As stated in E2, these component loads are acceptable provided that the calculated
principal stress is less than 41 MPa. The problem is to determine the principal stress for the
suction nozzle and the discharge nozzle.
Table F-3A-Proposed Applied Nozzle Loadings

for Example 2A
Force Value Moment Value

(newtons) (newton meters)
4 NPS Suction
FXSA +2224 MXSA -136
FYSA -5338 MYSA -2034
FZSA +1334 MZSA +1356
3 NPS Discharge
FXDA +1334 MXDA +2712
FYDA -2224 MYDA -271
FZDA +445 MZDA -4136
F.4.2.2 Solution
F.4.2.2.1 Suction nozzle calculations are as follows: For Schedule 40 pipe with a nominal size of
100 mm, DO = 114 mm and DI = 102 mm. Therefore,
DO2 – DI2 = (114)2 – (102)2 = 2592

DO4 – DI4 = (114)4 – (102)4 = 6.065 x 107
[(FXSA )2 + (FZSA)2 ] 0.5 =[(-2224)2 + (+1334)2 ] 0.5 = 2593
[(MXSA )2 + (MZSA)2 ] 0.5 =[(-136)2 + (+1356)2 ] 0.5 = 1363

Equation F-7A is used to determine the longitudinal stress for the suction nozzle, σs.
Note: the applied FYSA load acting on the suction nozzle is the negative Y direction and will
produce a compressive stress; therefore, the negative sign on FYSA is used.
σs = [1.27 FYSA /(DO2 - DI2)]+ [ 1.02 x 104Do(MXSA2 + MZSA2)0.5 ]/ (Do4 - DI4)
= [1.27(-5338)/2592] + [1.02 x 104(114)(1363)]/ 6.065 x 107 = 23.52
92
Equation F-8A is used to determine the shear stress for the suction nozzle, τs.
τs = [1.27(FXSA2 + FZSA2)0.5] / (Do2 - DI2)+ [0.51 x 104Do (MYSA)]/ (Do4 – DI4)
= [(1.27(2593)/2592] + [0.51 x 104(114)(|-2034|)]/6.065 x 107] = 20.77

The principal stress for the suction nozzle, Ps is calculated using Equation F-6A:
Ps = (σs/2) + (σs 2/ 4 + τs2)0.5 <41
= (+23.52/2) + [(+23.52) 2/ 4 +(+20.77)2)0.5 <41
= +35.63 < 41
Thus, the suction nozzle loads are satisfactory.
F.4.2.2.2 Discharge nozzle calculation are as follows:

For Schedule 40 pipe with a nominal size of 80mm, Do = 89mm and DI = 78mm. Therefore,
DO2 – DI2 = (89)2 – (78)2 = 1837

DO4 – DI4 = (89)4 – (78)4 = 2.573 x 107
[(FXDA )2 + (FZDA)2 ] 0.5 =[(+1334)2 + (+445)2 ] 0.5 = 1406

[(MXDA )2 + (MZDA)2 ] 0.5 =[(+2712)2 + (+136)2 ] 0.5 = 2715
Equation F-7A is used to determine the longitudinal stress for the discharge nozzle σD.
Note the applied FYSA load acting on the discharge is in the negative Y direction and will
produce a tensile stress; therefore, a positive sign on FYSA is used.
σD = [1.27 FYDA /(DO2 - DI2)]+ [ 1.02 x 104Do(MXDA2 + MZDA2)0.5 ]/ (Do4 - DI4)
= [1.27(+2224)/1837] + [1.02 x 104(89) (2715)]/2.573 x 107
Equation F-8A is used to determine the shear stress for the discharge nozzle, τs .
τD = [1.27(FXDA2 + FZDA2)0.5] / (Do2 – DI2)+ [0.51 x 104Do (MYDA)]/ (Do4 – DI4)
= [(1.27(1406)/1837] + [0.51 x 104(89)(|+2711|)]/2.573 x 107] = 5.75

The principal stress for the discharge nozzle, PD is calculated using Equation F-6A:
PD = (σD/2) + (σD 2/ 4 + τD2)0.5 <41
= (+97.33/2) + [(+97.33) 2/ 4 +(+5.75)2)0.5
= +97.67 > 41
Thus, the discharge nozzle loads are too large. By inspection, if MXDA is reduced by 50 percent
to 1356 Nm, the resulting principal stress will still exceed 41 MPA. Therefore, the maximum value
for MXDA will be twice MXDT2 , or 1900Nm.
93
13.14.2 SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Centrifugal pumps, in practically al cases, operate at high speeds and with very close internal
clearances.
Cold pumps, handling water and oil, usually have cast iron housings. Therefore, the allowable
forces and moments are lower than pumps of steel construction. Since API 610 only refers to
pumps of steel construction, when a quotation is sent to a vendor for a pump of cast iron
construction he should be required to submit comparable criteria for his pump in a similar format
to Tables 2-1A or 2-1B of API 610.
Sufficient working space should be provided around pumps so that any part of the pump or driver
can be removed. On jobs where maintenance supports are requested by the customer, the
supports must be arranged so that the piping is adequately supported when the removal section
has been dismounted.
Piping weights should be taken off of all nozzles preferably by the use of adjustable type
supports or in the case of hot pumps by using spring supports.
In the cases where pumps are handling hot material, the lines should be fully investigated to
determine if stops on the lines are required to direct thermal movement away from the pumps, in
order to keep the forces and moments acting on the pump within those allowed by the criteria in
API 670.
For a typical example of how to support centrifugal pump lines see figure 1 on the next page.
94
FIGURE I
ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT AND

SUPPORT STOP IF REQ’D.
OR SPRING IF
YARD BENT
SUPPORT AND N
STOP IF REQ’D.
ADJUSTABLE
SUPPORT
OR SPRING IF REQ’D.
L
C PUMP
GRA SHAFT
DE
95
GEAR PUMPS
13.15.1.0 GENERAL
Gear pumps are used to provide high suction lift or to handle high viscosity materials such as tar,
wax heavy crude oil, etc.
They are considered as rotary positive displacement pumps, are non pulsating and usually
furnished with horizontal suction and discharge nozzles, in accordance with
API-676.
13.15.2.0 NOZZLE LOADS
When rotary pumps are specified in accordance with API-676, allowable external forces and
moments from Section 2.4 of API-676 are applicable, unless the supplier allows greater values
(also see Section 13.16).
13.15.3.0 SUPPORT CONSIDERATIONS
The construction of the pumps usually permits the use of adjustable base supports for the piping
close to the pump nozzles without too much fear of differential expansion between the piping and
the pump. However, if the pump is operating at a high temperature or there is a small differential
settlement problem, then base type spring supports should be used.
96
13.16.1.0 GENERAL
13.16.1.1 This manual subject provides information about the various types of pumps
generally encountered in process plants, along with allowable nozzle loading
criteria and typical support requirements.
13.6.1.2 The following types of pumps are typically used in process plants:
13.16.1.2.1 Centrifugal pumps, which are the most commonly used pumps, and may be
horizontal or vertical (pump shaft) orientation;
13.16.1.2.2 Positive displacement pumps, which are usually either rotary or reciprocating type.
There are several sub-types of both rotary and reciprocating type pumps. A couple
of examples of Rotary pump sub-types are:
a. Liquid Ring Vacuum Pump;
b. Gear Pump - (refer to Design Manual - Section 13.15).
13.16.1.3 Centrifugal pumps, in practically all cases, operate at high speeds and with very
close internal clearances. Due to this, nozzle loads must be limited to reduce
potential pump deflections that might produce operating or maintenance problems.
13.16.1.4 Reciprocating pumps introduce pressure pulsation's into the piping system, which
requires pulsation and vibration control. Refer to API-674, Section 3.6 for
information regarding pulsation and vibration control for reciprocating pumps.
13.16.2.0 NOZZLE LOADS

Allowable loads on pump nozzles may be obtained from one of the following
sources:
13.16.2.1 Client allowable nozzle loads, if client specifications stipulate allowable pump
nozzle loads.
13.16.2.2 API-610 allowable nozzle loads, when centrifugal pumps are specified in
accordance with this standard. API-610 allowable external nozzle forces and
moments (see design manual - Section 13.14).
97
13.6.2.3 Supplier allowable nozzle loads for:
13.16.2.3.1 "ANSI" Pumps, when centrifugal pumps are specified in accordance with the ASME
B73 series of standards;
13.16.2.3.2 Reciprocating pumps (API-674), Controlled Volume pumps (API-675) or Liquid Ring
Vacuum pumps (API-681, with allowable nozzle loads at least equal to the values
calculated in accordance with NEMA SM-23);
13.16.2.3.3 Pumps of non-steel material;
13.16.2.3.4 API-610 pumps when the supplier allows greater nozzle loads.
13.16.2.4 API-676 allowable nozzle loads, when Rotary Pumps are specified in accordance
with this standard. API-676 nozzle allowable external forces and moments are
addressed in API-676, Section 2.4.
13.16.2.5 Reciprocating pump suction and discharge piping is subject to vibration, and must
be supported for vibration. The extent of piping that is subject to vibration, and
vibration support methods are similar to those for reciprocating compressors (refer
to Design Manual Section 13.11). Refer to API-674 Section 3.6, API-674 Appendix F
and consult with the Piping Mechanical technical specialist or CPE to confirm the
appropriate design approach for each reciprocating pump installation.
13.6.2.6.0 Vertical inline pumps/piping supports shall conform to the following:
13.16.2.6.1 Inline pumps with baseplates shall be supported by concrete piers and anchored if
possible (to be verified with Machinery Engineer), unless the layout requires the
pump(s) NOT to be anchored;
13.16.2.6.2 The suction and discharge lines shall be supported by trunnions and/or adjustable
supports, as appropriate;
13.16.2.6.3 When the pump design does NOT allow anchoring, and the layout allows anchoring
at the pumps, the suction side supporting trunnion shall be anchored;
13.16.2.6.4 When the inline pump design does not include provisions for supporting of the
pump, and the pump weight is small, the pump may be supported from the piping
supports (trunnions);
13.16.2.6.5 Inline pump support/anchor requirements shall be included as notes to C/S on the
Plant Layout Release.
98
13.6.3.0 SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
13.16.3.1 Sufficient working space should be provided around pumps so that any part of the
pump or driver can be removed. On jobs where maintenance supports are
requested by the customer, the supports must be rearranged so that the piping is
adequately supported when the removal sections have been dismounted.
13.16.3.2 Piping weights should be taken off of all nozzles preferably by the use of adjustable
type supports or in the case of hot pumps by using spring supports.
13.16.3.3 In the cases where pumps are handling hot material, the lines should be fully
investigated to determine if stops on the lines are required to direct thermal
movements away from the pumps, in order to keep the forces and moments acting
on the pumps within those allowed.
13.16.3.4 For a typical example of how to support centrifugal pump lines see Figure I.
13.16.3.5 Reciprocating pump suction and discharge piping is subject to vibration and must
be supported for vibration. The extent of piping that is subject to vibration, and
vibration support methods are similar to those for reciprocating compressors (refer
to Design Manual Section 13.11). Refer to API-674 Section 3.6, API-674 Appendix F
and consult with the Piping Mechanical technical specialist or CPE to confirm that
appropriate design approach for each reciprocating pump installation.
13.6.3.6 Vertical inline pumps/piping supports shall conform to the following:
13.16.3.6.1 Inline pumps with baseplates shall be supported by concrete piers and anchored if
possible (to be verified with Machinery Engineer), unless the layout requires the
pump(s) NOT to be anchored;
13.16.3.6.2 The suction and discharge lines shall be supported by trunnions and/or adjustable
supports as appropriate;
13.16.3.6.3 When the pump design does NOT allow anchoring, and the layout allows anchoring
at the pumps, the suction side supporting trunnion shall be anchored;
13.16.3.6.4 When the inline pump design does not include provisions for supporting of the
pump, and the pump weight is small, the pump may be supported from the piping
supports (trunnions);
13.16.3.6.5 Inline pump support/anchor requirements shall be included as notes to C/S on the
Plant Layout Release.
Figure I - Centrifugal Pump Support Example – See Design Manual section 13.14
Attachments:-
API-674, Section 3.6 (attachment 1 – page 5)
API-674, Appendix F (attachment 2 – page 9)
99
API-676, Section 2.4 (attachment 3 – page 13)
Attachment 1
Extract from API 674 (1995) Positive Displacement Pumps - Reciprocating
3.6 Pulsation and Vibration Control Requirements
3.6.1 GENERAL
3.6.1.1 The interaction of the dynamic flow generated by the pump plungers with acoustical
resonances in piping systems can result in high-pressure pulsation levels in the pump and
piping, cavitation, excessive vibrations and failures. The pulsation characteristics of a piping
system are dependent upon the complexity of the system layout, number of pumps. operating
speeds, fluid properties and other factors such as, but not limited to, the following:
a. Pump type.
b. Pui-np size (power).
c. Number of plungers.
d. Speed range.
e. Pumped fluid properties.
f. System operational conditions.
g. Piping layout.
3.6.1.2 The basic techniques used for control of detrimental pulsations and vibrations are
the following:
a. Pulsation control devices such as dampeners, accumulators, dampers, preventers,

hydraulic isolators, inhibitors, suppressors, stabilizers, acoustic filters, and selected piping
configurations.
b. System design based on studies of the interactive effects of pulsations and the attenuation
requirements for satisfactory pipinc, vibration, pump performance, and valve life. c. Mechanical
restraints including such things as type, location, and number of pipe hold-downs.
Note:Normally, control of system pulsation, cavitation, and vibration requires the coordination of
the pump manufacturer and the piping system designer in order to ensure that the complete
system is suitable for the intended purpose.
3.6.2 PULSATION DESIGN APPROACHES
· 3.6.2.1 The purchaser will specify the design approach for pulsation and vibration control
as defined in Appendix E. The purchaser will also indicate when existing pumps and their
associated piping are to be included in the acoustical simulation. There are two general
techniques (design approaches) normally used for control of detrimental pulsations and
vibrations.
Note: When deciding which design approach should be used, the purchaser should consider such things as
horsepower, economics. piping layout, reliability, documentation requirements, and experience with
similar pumps and installations.
100
Design Approach 1: This approach involves pulsation and vibration control through the use of
good piping layout and support/restraint principles, adequate suction pressure (NPSHA), and/or
the use of pulsation control devices.
Design Approach I does not require an acoustical simulation of the pump and piping system
and can be used when experience with similar systems indicates that the likelihood of
successful operation is sufficient to justify no acoustical simulation.
Note: Cavitation problems in pump systems are significantly influenced by pulsations; therefore, suction-head
assessment based on acceleration head calculations, which is a quasi-static method of considering pulsations in
piping systems, may not ensure adequate NPSHA.
Design Approach 2: This approach involves pulsation control through the use of pulsation
control devices developed using proven acoustical simulation techniques in conjunction with
mechanical analysis of pipe runs and support systems (clamp design and spacina) to achieve
control of vibrational response. Design Approach 2 is normally applicable to critical pump and
piping systems, multiple pumps in parallel, and applications utilizing variable speed, multiple
fluids, and variable operating conditions, where safety and reliability are important, and where
suitability of purpose must be documented.
The acoustical characteristics of the entire pump system, including the pump and all important
interconnecting piping shall be simulated. The simulation techniques shall be capable of
modeling the pulsation-generating mechanisms known to cause pump pulsation and shall be
capable of predicting pulsation and shaking force amplitudes throughout the pump and piping
system. The simulation techniques shall be capable of evaluating the effectiveness of selected
pulsation control devices and/or developing effective acoustical surge volumes, Helmholtz-type
acoustic filters, and so forth, if required.
Note: Pump valve dynamic effects, such as lag, lift, spring preload and stiffness, and valve areas, may have a
significant influence on pulsation amplitudes and therefore should be considered in the acoustical
simulation.
The acoustical simulation techniques shall also be capable of predicting the potential for
cavitation and the required minimum suction pressure to prevent cavitation, based on the
amplitudes of the pulsations.
Note: When the acoustical simulation is performed, acceleration head pressure calculations arc not required since
the complex pressure wave at the plungers determined by the simulation method more accurately represents the
requirements in fluid head required to fill the working chamber.
Design Approach 2, in conjunction with pulsation simulation, shall include a mechanical

evaluation of the piping system to ensure that the piping will have adequate supports and
clamps to maintain the mechanical natural frequencies above the highest frequency of major
acoustical energy. The required spacing and clamp types to ensure non-resonant piping
systems shall be determined by the simulation. The mechanical analysis shall ensure that the
piping vibration-induced stresses are less than the endurance limit of the piping material with an
adequate safety factor.
101
3.6.2.2 Maximum allowable pulsation involves the following:
3.6.2.2.1 For Design Approach 2, the peak-to-peak pulsation levels in the suction and
discharge piping systems beyond the pulsation control devices shall not exceed the levels
calculated by Equation 3-1 which specifies the allowable peak-to-peak pulsation level of each
individual pulsation frequency component.
(3-1)
Where:
P1 maximum allowable pulsation level in kPa (psi), peak-to-peak of individual pulsation

components corresponding to the fundamental and harmonic frequencies.
Note: Suction and discharge pulsation levels have to be limited to values that will not cause
cavitation or relief valve lifting.
ID = inside diameter of line pipe, in millimeters (inches).

ƒ = pulsation frequency, in Hertz, derived from the following equation, in which
rpm is pump speed and n = 1, 2, 3, ..., corresponding to the fundamental frequency
and harmonics thereof:
(3-2)
3.6.2.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the maximum suction complex pressure wave
amplitude (Figure 3) shall not exceed the value calculated using Equation 3-2.
P2 = 1.5(Ps – Pv)
Where:
Pv = vapor pressure of the pumped fluid, in kPa abs (psia).
Ps = average suction pressure, in kPa abs (psia).
P2 = complex pressure wave, in kPa (psi).
102
Note: The theoretical maximum amplitude of the suction pulsation occurs when the negative peak of the pulsation complex wave equals the
average suction pressure minus the vapour pressure. Equation 3-2 provides for a margin of safety between the negative peak of the pulsation
and the vapour pressure.
3.6.2.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, the margin of separation between the positive peak of
the pulsation complex wave at the relief valve and the relief valve setting shall be 5 percent of the
maximum specified discharge pressure or 165 kPa (25 psi), whichever is greater (Figure 4).
PP ≤ PR – PD –(0.05x PD)* (3-3)
*[ or 165kPa (25 psi), whichever is greater]
Where:
PP = Positive peak of pulsation complex wave, in kPa (psi).
PD = The maximum specified value of average discharge pressure, in kPa gauge (psig).
PR = Required relief valve setting, in kPA gauge (psig).
103
Attachment 2
Extract from API 674 (1995)
APPENDIX F- GUIDELINE FOR PUMP PIPING DESIGN AND

PREPARATION FOR AN ACOUSTICAL SIMULATION ANALYSIS
F.1 General
F.1.1 Any reciprocating pump in conjunction with a piping system forms an interactive
dynamic system that cannot be accurately analysed as two separate systems.
Therefore, it is very difficult for the pulsation system designer and the piping system designer
to arrive at proposed designs on an independent basis that can be guaranteed to work in the
final analysis and be cost effective.
F.1.2 Subsection 3.6.1 of this standard defines the technical requirements placed on the
pulsation control system designer. This appendix gives guidelines for the piping system
designer which may help to minimize problems that can occur at the time of the acoustical
simulation, and outlines the infonnation that must be available at the time of this interactive
analysis. Communication between the piping system designer, the pump vendor, and the
pulsation control device designer during the course of a project is important to minimizing
problems and developing the best overall pump system installation. The key times of
interaction are at the post-order co-ordination meeting early in the project and during the
interactive acoustical simulation/mechanical analysis.
F.1.3 The purchaser mav elect to perform an in-house acoustical simulation, use
equipment vendor services, or use services of a third party.
F.2 Acoustical Considerations in Piping Designs
F.2.1 The interaction of the pump, pulsation control devices, and piping system produces
potentially harmful pulsations when there is resonant interaction between the various elements
in the system. The system designer can help to minimize this interaction by avoiding resonant
lengths of constant diameter pipe for constant speed pumps. When resonant lengths of
constant diameter pipe are used and the resonant frequency matches multiples of plunger
frequency, one can expect major changes to the system as a result of the acoustical
simulation analysis. The resonant length of various piping configurations is given in the
following equation. It is recommended that lengths of these configurations be avoided in a
±10 percent b,-tnd for the first four harmonics of plunger frequency. The piping areas where
this is most important are the sections of piping nearest the pump.
104
F.2.2 For piping sections open at both ends or closed at both ends. the length to be
avoided can be calculated from the following:
(F-1)
Where:
LH = Pipe length to be avoided, in meters (feet).
C = Velocity of sound in liquid, in meters/sec (ft/sec).
it = Harmonic number (1, 2, 3, and 4).
p = Number of plungers (3, 5, 7, 9, and so forth).
N = Pump speed, in rpm.
Examples of this are lengths between major volumes, length of headers, and so forth.
F.2.3 For pipe sections open at one end and closed at the other end, the lengths are to
be calculated from the following:
(F-2)
Where:
LQ = Pipe length to be avoided, in meters (feet).

C = Velocity of sound in liquid, in meters/sec (ft/sec).
11 = Harmonic number (1, 2, 3, and 4).
p = Number of plungers (3, 5, 7, 9, and so forth).
N = Pump speed, in rpm.
Examples of this are relief valve lines and bypass lines.
Note: Pipe diameter changing from a small to a larger size can be considered an open end
when the diameter change is two to one or more. Similarly, pipe diameter changes from a
large to a small diameter can be considered a closed end when the diameter change is two to
one or more.
F.2.4 The design must be checked with an acoustical simulation after the piping design
has been completed with the initial location of mechanical restraints, and the pipe thermal
stresses are found to be in acceptable limits.
F.2.5 For variable speed pumps and/or those with varying velocity of sound, and for
multiple pump installations, the separation of resonances is more difficult to calculate and can
be handled properly only with an acoustical simulation study.
105
F.3 Acoustical Simulation Overview
F.3.1 The extent of the piping system to be analysed by acoustical simulation techniques is
usually defined as all the associated piping to a point where piping changes will have only
insignificant effects on the parts of the system under study and in determining the acoustical
characteristics of the design. Typically, these requirements are satisfied by beginning the
simulation with the inlet of a major process vessel or volume on the suction side of the pump
unit(s), and terminating the study at the outlet of a major process vessel or volume on the
discharge side of the unit(s) or into an infinite line (sufficiently long that reflections will be
attenuated to very low levels). Lateral lines to or from this system, such as relief valve lines
and bypass lines, should be included in the analysis.
F.3.2 When major volumes do not exist or are very remote from the pump, suitable piping
lengths are included such that the pulsation levels are sufficiently low so as to minimize the
potential of pulsation-driven vibration problems.
F.4 Information Required
F.4.1 THE CO-ORDINATOR
The acoustical simulation requires a considerable amount of information in order to be

properly performed. The purchaser, or his representative, normally serves as co-ordinator to
see that the information is available.
F.4.2 INFORMATION FROM THE SYSTEM DESIGNER
F.4.2.1 A data sheet is required showing all pump operating conditions (speed, pressures,
etc.) and all fluids to be pumped.
F.4.2.2 Isometric drawings are required showing all lengths (between bends, valves,
diameter changes, and so forth) and line sizes and schedules for the complete piping systems,
including all branch lines and safety valve lines. If a mechanical study is included, the
distance between the supports and the type of support and clamp used at each location must
be shown on the isometrics. A detailed drawing of each type of support and clamp is required.
F.4.2.3 Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&IDs) are required to ensure that all piping and
equipment that may affect the study are included.
F.4.2.4 Layout drawings are required to help determine the practicality of any proposed
modifications. Reproducible drawings are useful since they can be marked up and copies
included in the report.
F.4.2.5 Complete information must be supplied on all of the piping up to and including the
first large volume in the suction and the discharge piping to a large vessel or to an acoustical
infinite line. Every branch must be included up to a shutoff valve or a large volume.
F.4.2.6 Any orifice or other flow resistive device must be shown and complete details on
pressure drop provided.
F.4.2.7 Detailed drawings of each vessel, showing the location of all nozzles, the internal
diameter, and the length, as well as details of any vessel internals are required. Design
106
pressure drops in these vessels must be shown.
F.4.2.8 If there are different fluid routings, a complete description must be included to show
the relative positions of all the valves for each routing. If different fluids are involved, the
description must show which routings apply to which fluids. Flow from/to any sidestream must
be shown, including fluid contents, flow rate, and direction.
F.4.2.9 When two or more pumps are connected to the same piping system, a clear
description is required explaining how they will operate.
F.4.3 INFORMATION FROM THE PULSATION CONTROL DEVICE VENDOR
Information from the pulsation control device vendor should include detailed dimensional
drawings on each pulsation control device showing the location of all nozzles, lengths, internal
diameters, and details on internals, if any. Pulsation control devices with internal gas-charged
bladders or gas blankets should clearly indicate the volume of gas and the charge pressure.
The design pressure drop for the design flow should be specified. The pulsation control
device vendor should supply sufficient information to characterize the effective spring and
mass properties of any gas-charged elastomer bladder device.
F.4.4 INFORMATION FROM THE PUMP VENDOR
Information from the pump vendor is shown in the following Table F-1.
Table F-1 -Information From the Pump Vendor
Pump Data Design Approach

1 2
Pump Data :-
Pump Cylinder (internal Passages) X X
Pump Geometric Data (Bore, Stroke, RPM) X X
Pump Valve Data :-

Type of Valves X
Valve Lift X
Weight X
Spring Pre-Load X
Spring Rate X
Full Projected Area X
Lift Area X
Effective Full Lift Flow Area X
107
Attachment 3
Extract from API 676 (1994) – Positive Dispalcement Pumps - Rotary

2.4. External Forces and Moments
For pumps with steel or alloy – steel casings, inlet and outlet nozzles shall be capable of
withstanding forces and moments from external piping determined by the following formula (see
Figure 1):
In imperial units
FX = 430D, MX = 2350D
FY = 430D, MY = 2350D
FZ = 430D, MZ = 2350D
Or in conventional (metric) units
FX = 75D, MX = 125D
FY = 75D, MY = 125D
FZ = 75D, MZ = 125D
Where:
D = nominal pipe size of pump nozzle connection in millimetres (inches)
FX = force in Newtons (pounds) on the x-axis, which is parallel to the shaft axis.
Fy = horizontal force in Newtons (pounds) on the y-axis, which is mutually
perpendicular to the x- and z axes.
FZ = vertical force in Newtons (pounds) on the y-axis, which is mutually perpendicular
to the y- and x axes.
MX = moment around the x-axis, in Newton-metres (pound feet).
MY = moment around the y-axis, in Newton-metres (pound feet).
MZ = moment around the z-axis, in Newton-metres (pound feet).
The vendor shall submit comparable criteria for pump casings constructed of other materials
108
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR WIND LOADS
13.17.0. GENERAL
13.17.1.1 Scope
13.17.1.1.1 This specification covers design requirements for wind loads acting on the
following:
a. enclosed structures such as buildings and furnaces
b. unenclosed structures such as skeleton frames
c. equipment such as pressure vessels, exchangers, heaters, stacks, storage
tanks, and hoppers
d. piping.
13.17.1.1.2 Design for wind loads, including formulae used and values for coefficients shall
normally be in accordance with Section 6 of ASCE 7 and this specification. Project
specific standards may govern where they are specified.
13.17.1.2 Industry Standards
The following documents are referenced herein and form part of the Order. Current
editions of the industry standards including all mandatory addenda in effect at the
time of the order shall apply unless otherwise indicated.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

ASCE 7-95, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures"
BS CP3 Chapter 5 part 2.
13.21.2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
13.21.2.1 Velocity Pressure
13.21.2.1.1 The Basic Wind Speed ("V" in Equation 6-1 of ASCE 7) used in the design for wind
loads shall be based on the following:
a. for locations within the United States, Figure 6-1 except as provided in 6.5.2.1 and
6.5.2.2 of ASCE 7.
b. for locations outside the United States, the 3-second gust wind speed for the
general location, occurring at 33 feet (10 m) above ground corresponding to
Exposure C, as specified in ASCE 7, and associated with an annual probability
of 0.02 of being equaled or exceeded.
13.21.2.1.2 In the absence of project information, the Occupancy Category shall be III in
accordance with ASCE Table 1-1 and the Importance Factor ( “I” in Equation 6-1 of
ASCE 7), shall be 1.15, in accordance with
ASCE 7 Table 6-2.
109
13.17.2.2 Force Coefficients, Cf
13.17.2.2.1 The force coefficients for free standing structures and equipment cantilevered from
their base, such as vertical vessels, tanks, stacks, chimneys, and silos, shall be in
accordance with Table 6-7 of ASCE 7. The force coefficients for other items, such
as horizontal vessels, exchangers, and similar equipment, shall be in accordance
with Table I below:
TABLE I - FORCE COEFFICIENTS, Cf
Various Surface Types for Horizontal Vessels, Exchangers, etc.
EQUIPMENT SURFACE Cf *
Vertical flat 1.8
Round, conical, spherical (Vessels) 0.8
Hexagonal & octagonal 1.2
Pipes 1.2 to 0.7
* Cf is a function of D and height/Diameter or height /width. See ASCE 7 table 12.

For pipes assume h/D = 25 to allow for the effects of fittings blocking the free passage
of air around the ends of the pipe.
13.17.2.2.2 The force coefficients for skeleton frame structures (e.g., open steel or concrete
structures) shall be calculated based on established industrial practices consistent
with ASCE 7. The wind loads on equipment and other items contained within or
attached to skeleton frame structures shall be calculated separately using force
coefficients appropriate to their shape.
110
VIBRATION
13.18.1.0 VIBRATION RESONANCE 108

13.18.1.1 Source of Vibration 108
13.18.1.2 Effects of Resonance 108
13.18.1.3 Resonance Avoidance 108
13.18.2.0 VIBRATION SOURCE FREQUENCY 109
13.18.2.1 Reciprocating Compressors 109
13.18.2.2 Centrifugal Compressors 110
13.18.2.3 Wind - Vortex Shedding 111
13.18.3.0 PIPING NATURAL FREQUENCY 112
13.18.3.1 Basic Equation 112
13.18.3.2 Span Shape Factor, SHP 113
13.18.3.3 End Restraint Factor, END 115
13.18.3.4 Concentrated Mass Factor, CON 117
13.18.3.5 Heavy Insulation Factor 119
111
13.18.1.0 VIBRATION RESONANCE
Most of the problems and failures in piping subject to vibration are due to the occurrence of
resonance. The condition of resonance is reached when the frequency of the source of vibration
matches the mechanical natural frequency of a span of pipe.
13.18.1.1 Source of Vibration
While any source of oscillating force will be a source of vibration, the sources of vibration which
are most troublesome to piping are the fluid either inside or outside the pipe.
Reciprocating compressors, the main source of vibration problems, generate pressure pulses in
the gas being compressed. These pulses are carried by the piping and will generate a pulsating
force on the pipe. Reciprocating pumps produce vibrations in a similar manner.
Flow in a header past a branch connection will generate pressure pulses as the flow crosses this
opening. If the length of the branch from this connection to a closed or partially closed valve is
right, the small pressure pulses generated by the flow are amplified into pulses large enough to
cause vibration problems. While this phenomena can occur in any piping system, it can be the
most expensive to correct or alleviate in a centrifugal compressor system.
Wind blowing across the outside of a pipe will generate an alternating pressure perpendicular to
the wind due to vortex shedding. The alternating pressure causes alternating forces across the
pipe.
13.18.1.2 Effects of Resonance
When resonance occurs, the effect of a force is multiplied by ten or more times. A relatively small
force can have a large and destructive effect. During resonance the force from the source of
vibration pushes on the pipe at the exact moment when the spring force in the pipe is the
strongest and in the same direction. Thus the deflections are magnified and the alternating
stresses, which produce fatigue failures, are magnified.
13.18.1.3 Resonance Avoidance
The design of piping systems for vibrating conditions is based upon avoiding resonance. The
technique can be deduced from the definition of resonance. If the frequency of the source of
vibration does not match the mechanical natural frequency of the span of pipe, there is no
resonance.
This technique requires a good knowledge of both the frequency of the source of vibration and
the mechanical frequency of the pipe.
112
Since a span of pipe has a number of natural frequencies the lowest natural frequency is
designed to be at least 20% above the frequently of the source of vibration. The frequency which
is 20% above (out of the resonance region) the frequency of the source of vibration is called the
minimum natural frequency of the pipe,.MNFP. The mechanical natural frequency of the pipe
span is called the actual mechanical natural frequency of the pipe, ANFP. ANFP is greater than
or equal to MNFP.
13.18.2.0 VIBRATION SOURCE FREQUENCY
The frequency of the source of vibration must be predicted in order to establish the minimum
natural frequency of the pipe.
13.18.2.1 Reciprocating Compressors
The reciprocating motion of the piston is the generator of the pressure pulses which are the
source of vibration. Therefore the frequency of vibration is determined by the speed of the
compressor (RPM) and whether the piston is single or double acting. The highest frequency of
pulsation in the piping can only be determined by an acoustic study of the system, but an
estimate of this frequency can be made. Final verification of this frequency can only come from
the acoustic study.
To estimate the minimum mechanical natural frequency of the pipe:
MNFP = A (RPM)
MNFP = minimum mechanical natural frequency of pipe, Hz
RPM = compressor speed, revolutions/minute
A = 0.067 when there is only one cylinder connected to a pulse bottle

(the cylinder can be either single or double acting).
= 0.08 when there are-two double-acting cylinders feeding into a common bottle with
90O phasing with respect to each other.
For values of “A” for other cylinder/ phasing combinations, consult with the technical specialist or
CPE.
113
13.18.2.2 Centrifugal Compressors
There are seldom vibration problems with centrifugal compressors. When field vibrations have
been experienced, they have usually been caused by flow past a branch connection when the
branch was terminated with a closed or partially closed valve. Vibrations due to the blade
passing frequency are seldom a field problem.
The vibration design which has been done for centrifugal compressors is to avoid the acoustic
amplification of the small pulses generated at the branch connection.
The lengths of the branch from the header to a closed or partially closed valve which should be
avoided are:
LA = 12.Kb.N.A.Db/(Vx1000)
A - acoustic velocity of the gas, m/sec
Db - inside diameter of branch, mm
Kb - flow constant which includes the range from .042 to .052
N - an integer number having values of N=1 or 3
V - mean flow velocity in header, m/sec
LA - lengths of branch pipe (from header to closed/partially closed

valves) ranges be avoided, m. (These lengths will be a series of
length ranges to be avoided. For example:
LA = 4m to 5 and 12m to 15m
114
13.18.2.3 Wind - Vortex Shedding
The flow of wind over a pipe can cause vibration due to vortex shedding. If resonance is present,
these vibrations can cause damage to the pipe and restraint system.
Flow Phenomenon
Alternating vortices produce an alternating sideways force on the pipe.
This phenomenon is known as the Strouhal effect. The frequency of this source of vibration
corresponds to a Strouhal number of 0.18 and yields the minimum natural frequency of the pipe,
MNFP.
MNFP = 2.59 V/(Dx0.012)
D - outside diameter of pipe, mm

V - Velocity of wind, m/sec
There is some doubt whether vortex shedding occurs in alternating patterns, which causes
vibration at high wind velocities. Uses of the Vertical Guide Table in Section 13.21 will avoid
resonance due to vortex shedding.
115
13.18.3.0 PIPING NATURAL FREQUENCY
13.18.3.1 Basic Equation
The actual mechanical natural frequency of a span of pipe, ANFP, must be greater than or equal
to the minimum mechanical natural frequency, MNFP, to avoid resonance. The basic equation
for ANFP uses the length of the span, material properties of the pipe, and the moment of inertia
of pipe cross section. There are modifying factors for the shape of the span, the type of end
restraint, the presence of concentrated mass, and extra pipe weight due to heavy insulation or
liquid contents.
ANFP = (SHP) (END) (CON) (INS) K/L2
ANFP - actual mechanical natural frequency of the pipe span, Hz

(This needs to be the lowest natural frequency.)
CON - concentrated mass factor, See Page 12.
E - pipe material modulus of elasticity at operating temperature, N/m 2
END - end restraint factor, See Page 10.
INS - heavy insulation factor, See Page 13.

(This factor can adjust for the presence of liquid rather than gas
inside the pipe.)
K - radius of gyration of bare pipe cross-section, m
L - length of pipe span or a portion of the span, m

(The length of pipe span used must be co-ordinated with the span
shape factor.)
SHP - span shape factor (The shape and size of span must be consistent
with the directions of restraint.) (See page 9)
ƒ - density of pipe material, Kg/m3
116
13.18.3.2 Span Shape Factor, SHP
In general the span shape factor is based upon the shape of the pipe between adjacent pipe
restraints, but caution must be used because the pipe restraint must be able to force a vibration
node on the pipe where the restraint contacts the pipe. A vibration node is a point of no vibration
motion. The vibration motions of concern are perpendicular to the axis of the pipe, therefore the
pipe restraint cannot allow any motion perpendicular to the pipe axis if it is to force a node.
Take the following illustration:

Y
A
B Z X
C
L1
L2
The span will be L1 + L2, not L1 and L2 separately. The restraint at B will not force a node in the Z
direction, therefore the entire span from A to C will vibrate as one unit. If the restraint at B had
also acted in the Z as well as the Y direction, there would have been two independent spans L 1
and L2 whose ANFP would have each been much larger than the ANFP of the combined span L 1
and L2.
In addition the use of resting supports for vibration service is bad practice because the forcing of
a node depends upon either the friction or the weight of the pipe being sufficient to force a node.
Weight or friction may not be sufficient. A clamp type of restraint, which securely prevents motion
in both the positive and negative sense of the directions being restrained should be used.
117
THIS IS BAD PRACTICE FOR VIBRATION SERVICE
A third pitfall involves the ANFP which results from in-plane or out-plane vibration motions. In
general, the ANFP is based on the out-plane mode of motion, but a particular combination of
restraints will cause the in- plane mode of motion to give a lower ANFP.
OUT-PLANE IN-PLANE
Notice the longer span for in-plane bending which may give a lower ANFP than out-plane
bending.
Span Shape Factor, SHP
118
Given below are several of the basic span shapes likely to occur between pipe restraints and
both the in-plane and out-plane values of SHP, the span shape factor. Other variations of these
shapes can be calculated with a dynamic analysis.
SPAN SHAPE FACTOR (SHP)

SPAN SHAPE
Out- plane in- plane
L
3.52 3.52
L
22.4 22.4
L
L 3.74 15.4
L
L 2.00 3.10
L
L L
L 2.26 2.80
The span shape factor can be

found for several variations
Of the 900 bend.
FL 25
Figure SEQ Figure \* ARABIC 1
L
20
SHP
15
119
0 45O 90O 135O
10 180O
13.18.3.3 End Restraint Factor, END
The end restraint factor, END, are all based upon a value of END=1.0 for a span of pipe which is
fixed at both ends, Since all of the span shape factors are fixed at both ends (excluding the
cantilever), the end restraint factors can adjust any span shape factor to reflect the actual type of
end restraint.
TYPE OF RESTRAINT END RESTRAINT FACTOR, END
1.0
Fixed -
Fixed
0.71
Fixed -
Simple
0.74 TO
0.85
Fixed -
Clamped
0.54 TO
0.71
Clamped -
Clamped
0.44
Simple -
Simple
120
13.18.3.4 Concentrated Mass Factor, CON
The effect of a concentrated mass, such as a valve, In one leg of a pipe span can be calculated
using the concentrated mass factor, CON. The equation for CON and the location factors, C, are
given below:
CON =
CON - Concentrated mass factor. This factor varies with the shape of the shape of the span
and the location of the mass along a particular leg.
C - Mass location factor. This factor is found in the following table.
P - Mass of the concentrated mass. Kg.
W - Total mass of leg L which includes the pipe, insulation and contents during
operation, Kg.
121
Concentrated Mass Factor, CON
SPAN SHAPE & MASS LOCATION FACTOR

MASS LOCATION C
L 3.9
Cantilever
L/2 L/2
2.7
Fixed -
Fixed
L/2 L/2
2.3
Fixed -
Simple
L/2 L/2
2.0
Simple -
Simple
L/2 L/2
0.28
L
L/2
L/2
L L 0.70
L
L/2
0.68
L/2 L
122
13.18.3.5 Heavy Insulation Factor

(or Liquid Contents Factor)
The formula for calculating ANFP is based upon the weight per unit length of bare uninsulated
pipe filled with gas. Most pipes subject to vibration fall into this category. Even the kg/m of
insulated pipe is so close to that of bare pipe that the ANFP of bare pipe is used for most
insulated pipes.
When the weight of insulation becomes high enough in comparison with the weight of bare pipe,
the extra weight will significantly lower the ANFP. The heavy insulation factor, INS, will adjust the
ANFP for the weight of insulation.
In addition, if the pipe is filled with liquid instead of gas, the effect will be the same as if the pipe
were covered with heavy insulation. The heavy insulation factor, INS, will adjust for the weight of
liquid. Be sure that the liquid-filled pipe represents an operating condition where vibration is
expected and not a hydrotest condition.
INS = 1.0, for wO/w more than 0.8
INS = for wO/w less than 0.8
INS - heavy insulation factor. Also used to adjust for liquid filled lines or any other factor
which increases the uniform distribution weight of pipe.
w - uniform distributed weight of pipe, insulation and contents (plus snow or

ice, if applicable), Kg/m.
wo - uniform distributed weight of bare pipe, Kg/m.
123
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR EARTHQUAKE LOADS
13.19.1 GENERAL
13.19.1.1 Scope
This Specification covers design requirements for earthquake loads acting on the
following:
a. enclosed structures such as buildings and furnaces

b. unenclosed structures such as skeleton frames
c. equipment such as pressure vessels, exchangers, heaters, stacks, storage
tanks, and hoppers
d. piping.
13.23.1.2.1 Codes, Industry Standards, and Technical Paper
The following documents are referenced herein and form part of the Order. Current
editions of the industry standards including all mandatory addenda in effect at the
time of the order shall apply unless otherwise indicated.
Project specifications may stipulate national codes other than those listed below. In
these circumstances project specifications should be used instead.
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)
API 620, "Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks"
API 650, "Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage"
Wozniak, R.S. and Mitchell, V.W "Basis of Seismic Design Provisions for Welded Steel Storage
Tanks"
(Ref: API 1978 Proceedings - Refinery Department)
INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE OF BUILDING OFFICIALS (ICBO)
UBC-97, "Uniform Building Code" Volume 2
13.23.2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
13.23.2.1 General
13.23.2.1.1 All structures and equipment other than flat bottomed, vertically oriented storage
tanks shall be designed to resist earthquake forces in accordance with the Uniform
Building Code, Volume 2, Chapter 16, Division IV (Earthquake Design).
124
13.23.2.1.2 Unless otherwise specified in the project documentation, the Occupancy Category
shall be 2 and the Importance Factor "I" or "Ip" (in Equations 30-4, 30-5, 30-6, 30-7,
32-1, and 34-1 of UBC) shall be 1.25 or 1.5 respectively in accordance with UBC
Table 16-K.
13.23.2.1.3 In the absence of project specific information, the Seismic Coefficient, C a shall be
determined in accordance with UBC Table 16-Q for soil profile types as follows:
Type "SD" shall be used for Zones 3 and 4

Type "SE" shall be used for 1, 2A and 2B
If the site specific soil data is available, the soil profile type shall be determined
from UBC Table 16-J and the corresponding "C a" value from UBC Table 16-Q.
13.23.2.2 Storage Tanks
13.19.2.2.1 The design for earthquake loads of flat-bottomed, vertically oriented storage tanks
(including tanks designed in accordance with API 620) and their anchorage shall be
in accordance with Appendix E of API 650 and Appendix L of API 620. The design
of earthquake loads for LNG tanks is excluded from the scope of this specification.
13.19.2.2.2 The overturning moment determined in accordance with Appendix E of API 650 is
that applied to the bottom of the tank shell. There are additional earthquake
induced forces and moments acting on the bottom of the tank which shall be
considered in the determination of soil bearing pressure and in the design of tank
foundations such as flat concrete slabs or pile-supported concrete mats. These
additional earthquake forces and moments shall be determined in accordance with
the paper: "Basis of Seismic Design Provisions for Welded Steel Storage Tanks,"
by R.S. Wozniak and V.W. Mitchell.
13.23.2.2.3 In the absence of project specific information, the following parameters shall be
used for earthquake load calculations in accordance with API 650:
Importance Factor "I" = 1.25 for ammonia tanks

Importance Factor "I" = 1.0 for all others
Site Coefficient "S" = 1.5
125
13.20.1.0 STRESSES IN THE PIPE
On the stresses in piping due to support settlements ASME B31.3, Para. 319.2.1 states:
"Movement due to earth settlement, since it is a single cycle effect, will not significantly influence
fatigue life. A displacement stress range greater than that permitted by para. 302.3.5(d) may be
allowable if due consideration is given to avoidance of excessive localized strain and end
reactions."
The allowable stress in piping due to any single non-repeated anchor movement (e.g., predicted
equipment or building settlement) shall be 3Sc as given in ASME B&PV Code, Section III, Div. 1,
NC3653.2(b) and can be expressed mathematically as:
i Mo / Z < 3.0 Sc (Equation 1)
Mo = resultant moment due to any single non-repeated anchor movement Nmm.
I = stress intensification factor.
Z = section modulus of the pipe, mm3.
Sc = allowable stress at minimum (cold) temperature, N/mm 2.
13.20.2.0 STRESSES IN THE PIPE AT THE VESSEL NOZZLES
The allowable stress in the pipe at the vessel nozzle connection due to the effect of the
equipment settlement is limited to 68.9N/mm2 (10,000 psi).
This allowable stress is based on the concept given in Equation (1) and the empirically derived
relationship between the governing design stress in the vessel shell and that in the pipe at the
vessel nozzle connection.
13.20.3.0 PIPE SUPPORTS FOR VESSEL PIPING
To meet the stress limitation in 13.24.2.0 above and design for 9.5mm of differential settlement, it
is necessary that the first solid support away from the nozzle or the support on the vessel be a
minimum of the distance (i.e., total length of pipe in the two horizontal directions with at least 3
elbows, suitable for absorbing the differential settlement) shown in the following table:
PIPE SIZE DISTANCE (M) PIPE SIZE DISTANCE (M)

4 3.05 16 5.8
6 3.56 18 6.4
8 4.27 20 6.71
10 4.88 22 7.02
12 5.2 24 7.32
14 5.5
126
Examples:
a. for piping connected to a vertical vessel and supported from that vessel, the required
length, L, is the developed length (L1 + L2) of the horizontal pipe before the next solid
support as shown in Figure 1;
b. see Figures 2 and 3 for piping connected to nozzles in horizontal vessels.
For differential settlements other than 9.5mm, the above lengths may be adjusted approximately
by multiplying them with a coefficient C given by the equation (2):
C =1.7(d/25.4)1/2 for d in mm. (Equation 2)
Where: d = The new value of settlement, mm.
EMBED Word.Picture.8 EMBED Word.Picture.8
L =L1 + L2 L =L1 + L2
FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2
L =L1 + L2 127
FIGURE 3
13.24.4.0 STRESSES IN THE PIPE AT API-610 PUMP NOZZLES
PIPE SIZE Bending Stress PIPE SIZE Bending Stress

N/mm2 N/mm2
2 50.13 10 9.96
3 33.25 12 8.3
4 25.81 14 7.35
6 16.96 16 6.35
8 12.77
The above stresses allow a margin for other loads.
PIPE SUPPORTS FOR API-610 PUMP PIPING

To meet the stress limitation in Part 4 above and design 3/8" of differential settlement, it is
necessary that the first solid support from the pump nozzle be a minimum distance away as
noted in the following table:

2 2.3 10 10.7
3 3.35 12 13.1
4 4.42 14 15.5
6 6.7 16 19.1
8 8.5
These distances assume that at least 2 elbows exist in the system, and that 2x the allowable
moment for the My direction is acceptable (see Table 2-1A of API 610).
Other checks may be required to establish that combinations of settlement, thermal, weight, and
any other applicable loads do not exceed the permitted limits in API 610
(also see design manual Section 13.14).
For differential settlements other than 9.5mm, the above lengths shall be adjusted by multiplying
them with a coefficient C given by the equation (2) shown on page 2 of 6.
128
13.20.6 STRESSES IN THE PIPE AT CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR NOZZLES

The allowable stress in the pipe at the compressor nozzle due to the effect of the equipment
settlement is limited to the value shown in the following table:

N/mm2 N/mm2
2 50.25 10 3.19
3 24.51 12 2.43
4 17.37 14 2.30
6 8.81 16 1.77
8 5.03
The above values were obtained by using the allowable loading data from API-617, and applying
the concept given in Equation (1), reducing it to reflect the special concerns for rotating
equipment.
13.20.7 PIPE SUPPORTS FOR API-617 CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR PIPING

To meet the stress limitation in Part 6 above and design for 3/8" of differential settlement, it is
necessary that the first solid support from the compressor nozzle be a minimum distance away
as noted in the following table:

2 1.53 10 12
3 2.8 12 14
4 3.5 14 14
6 5.6 16 16.2
8 8.5
These distances assume that at least 2 elbows exist in the system, and that the allowable
moment is limited to Mz per API 617 Appendix G, section G.2, para. b.2.
any other applicable loads do not exceed the permitted limits in API 617
(also see design manual Section 13.10).
For differential settlements other than 3/8", the above lengths shall be adjusted by multiplying
129
13.20.8 STRESSES IN THE PIPE AT TURBINE NOZZLES

The allowable stress in the pipe at the turbine nozzle due to the effect of the equipment
settlement is limited to the following value:

N/mm2 N/mm2
2 35.04 10 3.33
3 24.51 12 2.25
4 16.40 14 1.76
6 9.05 16 1.31
8 5.49
The above values were obtained by using the allowable loading data from NEMA SM-23 and
applying the concept given in Equation (1), reducing it to reflect the special concerns for rotating
equipment.
13.20.9 PIPE SUPPORTS FOR TURBINE PIPING

To meet the stress limitation in Part 8 above and design for 3/8" of differential settlement, it is
necessary that the first solid support from the turbine nozzle be a minimum distance away as
noted in the following table:

2 2.0 10 11.6
3 2.8 12 14.94
4 3.66 14 17.38
6 5.49 16 20.73
8 7.93
These distances assume that at least 2 elbows exist in the system, and that the allowable
moment is limited to 2xMz per NEMA SM-23 para 8.4.6.2., i.e. a NEMA factor of 2 have been
used. Lower NEMA factors may require more elbows, or longer straight pipe lengths. A margin
has been assumed for other stress loads.
any other applicable loads do not exceed the permitted limits in
NEMA SM-23 (also see design manual Section 13.12).
For differential settlements other than 3/8", the above lengths shall be adjusted by multiplying
130
13.20.10.0 DIFFERENTIAL SETTLEMENT FOR PIPING FLEXIBILITY ANALYSIS
13.20.10.1 Combinations of Equipment and Probable Settlement
a. Vessels to Yard Bents: 9.5mm of differential settlement.
b. Adjacent Pumps (similar loadings): Approaches zero inch.
c. Pump under Yard to Yard: Approaches zero inch, if soil pressure loadings are
approximately equal.
d. Adjacent Foundations of Similar Size with Similar loading conditions:

approaches zero inch.
e. Tanks: Approaches 25mm or more; but if pump or support is reasonably close,

the differential settlement should be approximately 9.5mm or less. For large
tanks, consult with the Civil/Structural work group leader to determine the pre-
settlement (due to hydrotesting) and the final settlement.
f. Cooling Towers: See Design Manual Section 13.9.
g. Supports local to sensitive equipment (Compressors/turbines) will generally be

supported on the same foundations bedrock as adjacent equipment and is to be
discussed with Lead Civil Engineer.
13.20.10.2 Restricted Settlement
Where differential settlement cannot be tolerated, consult with the Civil/Structural

work group leader about the possibilities of reducing soil pressures or combined
foundations.
a. Pump Nozzle Support: Cast support integral with the foundation (maximum
extension is 18 inches)
b. Tower and Reboiler: If there are problems, check with Civil/Structural work
group leader.
13.20.10.3 Special Note
The above values of differential settlement are given as a general guideline. They
are based on past experience.
Specific values of differential settlement must be based on the job requirements
and engineering judgement. For some projects a maximum of 12mm is taken as a
typical maximum settlement. In some cases a visual appraisal is made to ensure
equipment is not too closely coupled to racks and other equipment.
131
13.25.21.0 Underground Piping
13.21.1 Introduction
Buried pipe, for the most part, is fully restrained with sections of it where it emerges
above ground only partially restrained.
13.21.1.1 The Loads built up within the fully restrained line tend to be very large, and
the stress built up in the pipe means that the temperature range of pipes that can be
buried is limited.
For Carbon Steel, with an allowable hot and cold Stress of 20 ksi (137.9 MPa)
giving an allowable stress range (Sa) of 30 ksi (206.9 MPa) and a value of the
Elastic modulus (E) of 29.5 x 106 psi (203395 MPa) the maximum allowable strain
is :
Strain = Sa / E = (30/29.5) x 10-3 in/in (mm/mm)

= 1.22 in/100 ft (1.017 mm/m)
This is equivalent to a temperature range of 11°C to 100°C
Similarly for Austenitic Stainless Steel with an Sa value of 30 ksi (206.9 MPa) and
an E value of 28.3 x 106 psi (195121 MPa), the allowable Strain is: 1.27 in/100 ft
(1.06 mm/m)
This is equivalent to a temperature range of 11°C to 75°C
Design consideration are summarised in para 13.21.2.
13.25.2 Underground pipe lines are subject to the following design considerations:-
a) Internal design pressure(s)

b) Design temperatures
c) Anchor design.
d) Axial stress due to thermal expansion/ contraction.
e) Expansion of buried pipe that extend outside the soil/ ground.
f) Longitudinal buckling or ground heave due to build up of axial friction load
caused by thermal movement.
g) Wall collapse / buckling due to pressure of over burden and vehicular wheel
loads.
h) Corrosion. Underground lines maybe either coated or cathodically protected,
depending on soil conditions, pipe material and client specifications.
i) Where lines extend above the ground and connect to equipment, settlement
may have to be considered.
132
13.21.3 Design for internal pressure
This is usually based on ASME B31.3 if the pipe system is being treated as a
process line or general purpose line or ASME B31.4 or ASME B31.8 if the pipe
system is being treated as a distribution line or system. Specific project standards
may stipulate the use of other codes.
13.21.4 Anchor Block Design

The Buried Pipe will have valves and other pieces of equipment set in pits. These
items will have to be protected by anchor blocks adjacent to the pit to prevent pipe
expansion into the pit. These anchors are designed by the civil group from loads
given by the stress engineer.
The load applied to the anchor is the totally restrained load and is hence :
Fa = E.e.π(D-t)t +p.a (N)
Where:
e = Strain (mm/mm)
D = Pipe Outside Diameter (mm)
t = Nominal Wall Thickness (mm)
a = Pipe flow area. (mm2)
P = Internal pressure. (N/mm2)
E = Young’s modulus. (N/mm2)
As a rough guide, if the height of the anchor block is 'ht' (m), its width is 'l' (m) and
the depth of the bottom of the block from the surface of a sandy soil is 'H' (m) then
the maximum allowable anchor load (with a factor of safety of 1.5) is 'AL' (KN):
AL = 7 x H2.l with ht > H/2
13.21.5.0 Longitudinal buckling Control
In order to determine the weight of overburden required to control buckling, the first
step is to estimate the pipe axial load as follows:-
Axial Load “F” = (1-2ν).π.R2.p + 2.π.R.t.E.α.ΔT + Ft
This formula assumes that soil friction is such that the line becomes fully restrained,
locking in the thermal expansion and the axial pressure forces and that the line is
basically level.
133
Continued from para 13.21.5.0.
Where:-
F = Axial load (N)
R = mean pipe line diameter (mm).
T = Pipe line thickness (nominal uncorroded), (mm).
E = Young’s modulus
13 = Poisson’s ratio
α = Linear Thermal expansion coefficient (mm/mm/ OC).
ΔT = Temperature change in OC = Design temperature-installation temperature.
p = Internal pressure (N/mm2)
Ft = Force due to thermal flexural loads from connected branches/ bends.
(N)
The above assumes that there is no residual tension due to laying of the line as
maybe the case for sub sea lines
13.21.5.1 The restraining effects of the overburden and pipe weight
Consider a section of pipe assumed to have a small upward deflection as

below with axial load “F”:-
Load per length - w
Y F
F
X
L
Where:
Y = Upward defection
L = Effective span (Half wave length) equivalent to beam span.
X = Distance measured from a point of effective zero deflection.
w = Uniformly distributed load per unit length = effective weight of over burden
plus weight of pipe and contents (minimum).
For a standard beam simply supported over length “L” with axial load “F” the
moment at any point “X” along the beam is:-
M = w.L.X/2 –w.X2/2 - F.Yx equ. (1)
Yx = Deflection at any point “X” as some function of “X”.
134
If equ. (1) is differentiated twice with respect to “X”, to allow “w” to be determined,
the following equation is formed:-
= -w – F.
∴ w= - - F.
“M” maybe approximated to EI as assumed for classical beam calculations.
∴w = -EI - F. equ. (2)
I = Moment of inertia = π (O.D.2-I.D.2)/64

O.D.= pipe outside diameter., I.D. = pipe inside diameter (base on corroded value).
If the function for YX is assumed to be Y.sin(π.X/L) then:-
= - Y.(π./L)2. sin(π.X/L)
and:-
= Y.(π./L)4. sin(π.X/L)
Substituting the above in equation (2) gives:-
w = -E.I.Y.(π./L)4. sin(π.X/L) + F.Y.(π./L)2. sin(π.X/L)
The maximum occurs when X = L/2 i.e. at sin(90 O) =1.
∴wmax =F.Y.(π./L)2 -E.I.Y.(π./L)4
135
To obtain L for maximum wmax differentiate wmax with respect to L to give;-
= F.Y.( π2).(-2.L-3) – E.I.Y.( π4).(-4.L-5)
Equate the above to zero to find Maximum wmax to give:-
F.(-2.L-3) = E.I.( π2).(-4.L-5)
∴ = L2 = 2.E.I.( π2)/F
∴L = π. = 4.443
The maximum for wmax will be realised if L = 4.443 as above.
In calculating wmax , a safety factor is required, typically 1.5 and an indicative value
for Y, the peak deflection will have to be estimated.
For a first estimate, check the theoretical height produced by bowing Db equal to
Db = [(4.e.L2/ π2) – (O.D.2/2)0.5
Use this as “Y” to calculate q.
If information on how far trenches bases deviate from level is available, check this
and compare it to Db. The inherent lack of straightness of the pipe should also be
considered. If the height of peaks in trenches + pipe deviation from straight is more
than Db, then use this figure for “Y” instead of Db.
API 5L clause 7.6, for instance permits an out of straightness of 0.2% of length
which is 12mm in 6 metres. The construction department should be consulted for
an indication of likely deviations from straight for trenches.
136
13.25.6.0 Expansion of Buried Pipe Sections Projecting Above ground
The position where a buried line becomes fully restrained is known as the virtual
anchor. The distance of the virtual anchor from where the line ceases being buried is 'L a'
(mm)
Then :
La = [(1-2ν).π.R2.p + 2.π.R.t.E.α.ΔT - S ]/f
Where:
f = Soil Friction (N/m)
Other units are as specified in Para. 13.21.5
Soil friction can be simplified to:
f = Wg.fr
Where:
Wg = (Ws + Wp)
= Total Weight acting on the pipe (N/m)
Ws= (2.D.h.d/K2)
= Weight of soil on the pipe (N/m)
Wp= Weight of Pipe and Contents (N/m)
D = Pipe Diameter (mm)
h = Height of soil above top of pipe (mm)
d = Density of Soil (N/m3)
(Typically 100 lb/ft3)
fr = Coefficient of Soil Friction
(Typically = 0.5)
S = Shear force due to thermal flexibility load
from attached pipe system above ground. (N)
This formula for Ws applies to fairly rigid pipe and must be re-considered
for thin alloyed lines over 24" / 600mm NB.
The growth out of the buried section of the pipe into the open is 'Def' (mm) and can
be calculated from:
Def = La. [α.ΔT + pR.(1-2ν)/(2.t.E) - (f.L/(2.A.E))]
Where: A = Cross sectional area of pipe = 2.π.R.t, or π (O.D. 2 – I.D.2)/4.

(mm2)
137
13.21.7.0 Control of Pipe Wall Collapse/ buckling
13.25.7.1 The following standards should be consulted with respect wall buckling
checks:-
AWWA M11, chapter 6.
API RP 1102 – Recommended Practice for Liquid Petroleum Pipelines Crossing

Railroads and Highways.
13.21.7.2 Allied to control of buckling is the depth of burial. Given below is a list of
recommended minimum embedments based on API RP 1102
Location Minimum
Cover - m
Rail Crossing-Under track structure proper. 1.8
Rail Crossing-Under all other surfaces within the right- 0.9
of-way of from the bottom of ditches
Rail Crossing – For pipelines transporting HVL 1.2
Highway Crossing –Under highway proper 1.2
Highway Crossing –Under all surfaces within the 0.9
right-of-way.
Highway crossing -For pipelines transporting HVL 1.2
Depending on the pipe diameter and thickness, the above embedments may have
to be increased. Reference should be made to the standards given above.
13.21.8.0 Corrosion Control
13.25.8.1 The pipe may have an external coating or wrapping for control of corrosion or cathodic
protection. Coating and wrapping systems will normally be specified by the paint and
insulation department, however for reference see NACE standard RP –10-69 Recommended
Practice – Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping
systems.
13.21.8.2 If the pipe system is to have cathodic protection, then it should be

remembered that the hydrogen gas that maybe evolved in such systems may
embrittle some high strength, higher carbon steels ( above API 5L X60) and duplex
stainless steel.
Cothodic protection systems are usually designed by specialist contractors.
13.21.9.0 Computer Programs
13.21.9.1 Pipe stress program Caesar II has standards options available for dealing with
underground pipelines. See Caesar manuals for details.
138
13.22.1 REINFORCING AT POINT OF SUPPORT FOR LARGE BARE LINES

(UP TO 350OF (176OC))
Pipe walls for bare pipe empty, whose spans are marked thus (†) on subject 13.26.3. require 1/4”
thick reinforcing pads at the point of support bearing, as dimensioned in the detail below, when
the load at the support exceeds 100%wl.
Pipe walls for bare water – filled pipe, whose spans are marked thus (†) require reinforcing pads
in accordance with the table and dimensions as shown in detail.
PAD REQUIREMENT
PIP CORR. NO 6mm 10mm
E PAD PAD PAD
SIZ SCH. ALLOW MAX LOAD AT SUPPORT
E .
(IN) (mm) (% WL)
16 STD 2.5 95 300 400
18 STD 2.5 70 200 300
20 STD 2.5 55 140 200
24 STD 2.5 35 90 140
16 XS 2.5 150 300 400
18 XS 2.5 110 200 300
20 XS 2.5 85 140 200
24 XS 2.5 55 90 140
16 XS 6 95 300 400
18 XS 6 70 200 300
20 XS 6 55 140 200
24 XS 6 35 90 140
SEE TABLE FOR

1/4” (6mm) FILLET WELD .
PAD THICKNESS
50mm LONG ON 100 CENTRES
(APPROX.)
NOTES:
1. For basic span “L” and unit line weight “W” see Section 13.26.3.
2. Where permissible, standard pipe shoes may be used in place of pads.
3. For thinner pipes/ larger diameters, a saddle angle larger than 90 O maybe
required.
139
13.22.2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF LARGE BARE PIPE LINES
(VAPOUR SERVICE UP TO 350OF)
Auxiliary supports shall be spaced in accordance with the following table:

(bearing surface shall be a minimum of 100mm long)
PIPE WALL
PIPE 9.5mm Wall 12.7mm Wall 12.7mm Wall
SIZE 2.5mm 2.5mm 6.35mm
Corr.Allow. Corr.Allow. Corr.Allow.
(IN) SPACING (metres)
14 15.85 18.9 15.85

16 12.2 16.45 12.2
18 9.14 12.8 9.14
20 7.3 10.36 7.3
24 4.87 6.7 4.87
Note:
Where the use of auxiliary supports for hydrostatic testing is to be avoided; permanent
supports shall be spaced in accordance with the corresponding spans for bare pipe water-filled
as shown in section 13.26.1 and the required pads shall be provided.
140
13.22.3 REINFORCING AT POINT OF SUPPORT AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING
OF LARGE BARE PIPE LINES
(OUTSIDE BATTERY LIMIT)
REINFORCING AT POINT OF SUPPORT FOR LARGE BARE PIPE LINES
(UP TO 400OF)
Pipe walls for bare pipe whose spans are marked thus (†) in Section 13.26.3 require reinforcing
pads at the point of support bearing in accordance with the table and dimensions as shown in
detail below:
BARE PIPE BARE PIPE

EMPTY WATER FILLED
PIPE CORR. PAD REQUIREMENT
SIZE SCH. ALLOW. NO PAD 6mm PAD NO PAD 6mm PAD 10mm
PAD
(IN) (mm) MAX LOAD AT SUPPORT (%WL)
14 STD 2.5 220 400 110 350 400
16 STD 2.5 170 350 80 250 400
18 STD 2.5 130 275 60 200 300
20 STD 2.5 105 200 45 130 200
24 STD 2.5 70 150 30 85 130
14 XS 2.5 225 400 135 350 400
16 XS 2.5 175 350 95 250 400
18 XS 2.5 135 275 70 200 300
20 XS 2.5 110 200 55 130 200
24 XS 2.5 75 150 35 85 130
14 XS 6 220 400 110 350 400
16 XS 6 170 350 80 250 400
18 XS 6 130 275 60 200 300
20 XS 6 105 200 45 130 200
24 XS 6 70 150 30 85 130
SEE TABLE FOR

1/4” (6mm) FILLET WELD . PAD THICKNESS
50mm LONG ON 100mm CENTRES
(APPROX.)
NOTES:
1. For basic span “L” and unit line weight “W” see Section 13.26.3.
2. Where permissible, standard pipe shoes may be used in place of pads.
3. For thinner pipes/ larger diameters, a saddle angle larger than 90 O maybe
required.
141
13.22.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF LARGE BARE PIPE LINES
(VAPOUR SERVICE UP TO 400OF)
Auxiliary supports shall be spaced in accordance with the following table:

(bearing surface shall be a minimum of 4” long)
PIPE WALL
PIPE Std. Wall XS Wall XS Wall
SIZE 2.5mm 2.5mm 6mm CA
CA CA
(IN) SPACING (Metres)
14 15.85 18.9 15.85

16 12.2 16.45 12.2
18 9.1 12.8 9.1
20 7.3 11.58 7.3
24 4.87 6.7 4.27
NOTE:
Where the use of auxiliary supports for hydrostatic testing is to be avoided; permanent supports
shall be spaced in accordance with the corresponding spans for bare pipe water – filled as
shown in section 13.26.3 and the required pads shall be provided.
142
13.22.5 LARGE O.D. PIPE WALL THICKNESS DESIGN
The minimum wall thickness of piping over 24” in diameter shall be computed in accordance with
the following equations (1) and (2) but shall not be less than that shown in table II:
T1 = TP + CA + 0.3mm see note (4)
T2 = Tmp + CA + 0.3mm see note (4)
Where:
T1 & T2 = minimum computed pipe wall thickness, (mm)
In any case T1 & T2 shall not be less than Tmin. In table II.
TP = Thickness required for pressure, based on para. 304.1.2 of
ASME B31.3, (mm) or as in the appropriate controlling standard for the
job or contract .
Tmp = minimum practical thickness as determined from Table I, (mm)
CA = Specified corrosion allowance, (mm)
0.3mm = Plate mill tolerance, (mm) see Note 2 below
TABLE I TABLE II
Pipe Size Tmp (mm) Pipe Size Tmin.
(mm)
26” – 36” 4.83 26” – 36” 6.35

38” – 58” 6.35 38” – 58” 7.94
60” – 72” 7.9 60” – 72” 9.53
The pipe sizes shown in Tables I and II may be OD or ID.

1. When ASTM specification (or other standards if appropriate), to which the large OD piping
is ordered, indicates the use of rolled and welded plate, the ordering thickness shall be
designated as a fraction in 1/16” increments for plate made to imperial dimensions or in
2mm increments for plate made to metric dimensions.
It may be advisable to check the availability of standard manufactured thicknesses.
2. When ASTM specification (or other standards if appropriate) indicates the use of schedule
numbers , the particular specification mill tolerance shall be used in lieu of 0.3mm. Check
the pipe material standard specified for the controlling mill tolerance.
3. For examples see page 6 and 7.
4. These minimum thicknesses given above may not satisfy requirements for underground/
buried pipe or pipe under external pressure. Refer to standard AWWA M11 chapter 6 for
guidance on the design requirements for buried pipe and ASME 8 Div 1, Sect. UG-28 for
pipe under External pressure.
143
13.22.5 Example 1
The following information is known:
Pipe size (Do) = 50” =

1270mm O.D.
Material =
A285 Grade C
Metal Temperature = 750OF
Internal Design Pressure (P)= 80 psig (0.5517N/mm2)
Corrosion allowance = 2.54mm
Allowable stress (S) = 12000

PSI (from appendix A, Table A-1 of
ASME B31.3) = 82.758N/mm2
Y = 0.4
E = 0.85
SE = 70.34N/mm2
Tp=
T1 = TP + CA + 0.3
= 4.965 + 2.54 +0.3

= 7.805mm
Based on equation (1)
T2 = Tmp + CA + 0.3
= 6.35 + 2.54 + 0.3
= 9.19mm
Tmin. = 7.94mm
From Table II
From the above T2 (9.19mm) the larger number governs and therefore the ordered
thickness to be specified is 10mm for metric plate or 3/8” for imperial plate. This may
not be sufficient for buried pipe or external pressures, the requirements for which, will
need to be checked separately.
This design is applicable to ferric and austenitic material. However, when there is an extensive
use of austenitic materials , the values of Tmp and Tm may be reduced provided the pressure
and structural requirements are satisfied.
144
145
13.22.5 Example 2
The following information is known:
Pipe size (Do) = 56” =

1422.4mm O.D.
Material =
API 5l Grd. “B”
Metal Temperature = 750OF
Internal Design Pressure (P)= 80 psig (0.5517N/mm2)
Corrosion allowance = 2.54mm
Allowable stress (S) = 13000

PSI (from appendix A, Table A-1 of
ASME B31.3) = 89.65N/mm2
Y = 0.4
E = 0.85 (ERW joint)
SE = 76.2N/mm2
Mill Tol. = 12.5% of ordered thickness (see API 5L Table 9.)
Tp=
T1 = TP + CA + 12.5% of T1
= 5.134 + 2.54 + 0.125T1

ƒ T1 -.125T1 = 5.134 + 2.54
ƒ T1(.875) = 7.674
ƒ T1 = 7.674/0.875
= 8.77mm
T2 = Tmp + CA + 0.125T2
= 6.35 + 2.54 + 0.125T2
ƒ T2 -.125T2 = 6.35 + 2.54
ƒ T2 (.875) = 8.89
T2 = 8.89/0.875
T2 = 10.16
Tmin. = 10.16mm
From Table II
From the above T2 (10.16mm) the larger number governs and therefore the ordered
thickness to be specified is 12mm for metric plate or 1/2” for imperial plate. This may not
146
be sufficient for buried pipe or external pressures, the requirements for which, will need to
be checked separately.
This design is applicable to ferric and austenitic material. However, when there is an extensive
use of austenitic materials , the values of Tmp and Tm may be reduced, provided that pressure
and structural requirements are satisfied.
147
MULTI-HOLED ORIFICE PLATES (FLAT)
DESIGN CRITERIA
Before engaging in the actual plate thickness calculation for a flat multi-holed orifice plate, it is
necessary to know the manner in which the holes are distributed on the face of the plate.
The holes should be evenly distributed over the entire area of the orifice plate and are laid out on
diagonal centres spaced 60O apart. The distance between the centres of adjacent holes along is
known as the pitch (P), as shown in Figure 1.
For even spacing it is necessary for one diagonal to intersect the centre of the plate and the first
hole must also be in the centre of the plate or the overall centroid of the holes should coincide
with the plate centre (see attachment 2 on page 9).
The number and size of the holes is the responsibility of the Systems Engineering Division. This
information will be shown on the flow sheet (P & I diagrams) along with the pressure drop across
the orifice plate.
In designing the thickness of the orifice plate, the following items must be known.
1. I.D. of the pipe.

2. Pressure drop across the orifice plate.
3. The number of holes required.
4. The diameter of the holes.
5. The allowable stress of the plate material at operating temperature.
To determine the correct pitch necessary to distribute the required number of holes evenly over
the entire plate area use the following formula:
P =
Where S = Weld Thickness – (mm)

P = Pitch – (mm)
N = Number of holes.
D = O.D. of the orifice plate or
= (I.D. of the pipe - mm) –3mm
148
FIGURE 1
“P”
60OF
TYP.
1.5mm ALL AROUND
ORIFICE PLATE “d”

"P"
I
.
“ D
D .
”
o
f
P
I
P
E
“S”
“S”
TYPE “A” TYPE “B”

WELD WELD
149
To determine the required weld thickness (S) use the following formulas:
F = (∆P) D
4
F t = F x TC
Ft ≤ Fa
Where Fa is the allowable unit weld load (from Table II) for the weld size selected.
For type A and B welds see Figure 1.
F = Unit weld load in N/linear mm

Ft = Unit weld load at design temperature
Fa = Allowable Unit weld load (see Table II) N/mm2
∆P = Pressure differential across the orifice plate N/mm2
D = O.D. of the orifice plate or the I.D. (mm)
of the pipe minus 3mm
TC = Temperature/ Material correction factor
(see Table I)
To determine the required thickness “t” of the orifice plate, use the following formula:
T =D. = D.
Where: D = O.D. of the orifice plate or the I.D. of the

Pipe minus 3mm
ΔP = Pressure differential across the orifice plate N/mm 2
E = Hole efficiency = (P-d)/P
Where: P = pitch – (mm)

d = diameter of holes (mm)
Sp = allowable stress of the plate material at design temperature.
Notes: 1. The reason that 0.5Sp is used in the equation is to compensate for any pulsations or
surging in the flow.
2. The minimum hole efficiency that can be used is 0.25.
3. The minimum weld thickness “S” should be 1/4” (6mm).
4. The maximum weld thickness “S” should be 3/8” (10mm)
5. The maximum orifice plate thickness “t” should be limited to 1.5”(38mm).
6. For requisitions use the drawings shown in attachments 1 and 2.
150
Sample Calculations
Design an orifice plate for a 16” diameter Sch. 30 carbon steel pipe. The plate is to have 65 –
20mm diameter holes and a pressure drop across the plate of 10 bar (1N/mm 2). The plate is
made of ASTM A285 GR. C plate at a design temperature of 300 OF.
Step 1: O.D. of orifice Plate (D)
D = (I.D. of pipe) – 3mm = 387 – 3mm

= 384
Step 2: Calculate weld thickness (S)
Total force = ΔP x Orifice plate area

Total length of weld = Circumference of plate
Unit weld load = F = (ΔP) D
4
= 1 x 384
4
= 96 N/Linear mm
Ft = F x TC = 96 x 1 = 96 N/Linear mm
Ft must be less than or equal to Fa.
From Table II the “Fa” for a 6mm type “A” weld

Is 198.5 N/Linear mm
Therefore “S” equal 6mm (type “A” weld)
151
Step 3: Calculate Pitch (P)
P =
P =
P = 40.93 use P = 40mm
Use lower value for pitch, otherwise number of holes will decrease.
Step 4: Calculate Hole Efficiency (E)
E =P–d
P
= 40 – 20
40
= 0.5
Step 5: Orifice Plate Thickness (t)
t = D.
For ASTM A285 CR. C at 300OF, SP = 17700 psi (122N/mm2)

(per ASME B31.3 -1999 Table A-1)
t = 384
t = 34.77 Use 36mm thick plate
GENERAL
When the pressure differential, the number of holes and the diameter of the holes are specfied,
but the size of the pipe is not given it then becomes necessary to calculate to O.D. of the orifice
plate, so that a pipe size may be selected.
152
Since the minimum hole efficiency that can be used is 0.25, by using this figure the minimum
pitch can be solved as follows:
E =P–d
P
P = = =
Substituting this value into the pitch equation
P =
Solve for the minimum orifice plate O.D. (D)
D = [[(N-3.7)/0.907] 1/2
+ 0.94] + 2S
Note: Since the value of “D” obtained by the above formula was based on a minimum “E” of
0.25, in cases where the pressure drop across the orifice plate is large, it is advisable
to use a larger value for “E” in order to reduce the orifice plate thickness.
153
Table I
Temp – Material Correction Factors

Temp OF Temp OC Material A Material B Material C
<200 <93.33 1.00 1.07 1.00
300 148.89 1.00 1.12 1.00
400 204.44 1.00 1.15 1.07
500 260.00 1.06 1.17 1.15
600 315.56 1.16 1.20 1.22
650 343.33 1.18 1.24 1.24
700 371.11 1.22 1.29 1.26
750 398.89 1.54 1.32 1.29
800 426.67 1.86 1.34 1.32
850 454.44 2.30 1.38 1.35
900 482.22 3.08 1.57 1.37
950 510.00 4.45 2.16 1.39
1000 537.78 8.00 3.18 1.45
Material A = ASTM A106 GR B.

Material B = ASTM A335 GR. P11
Material C = ASTM A312 GR. 304
Table II
Weld thickness N/ linear mm

In inches Type A Type B
6mm 198.5 397
8mm 264 528
10mm 330 660
154
TAG DESIGN DATA PLATE FABRICATION DATA PLATE INSTALLATION DATA

NUMBER
Lin Pl Orifice Run Te Pres PLAT Pl Nu Hol Pit Pl Hol Ov Weld Plat Refere Li Remar
e at Nomin Sch m sure E at mb e ch at e er- Si e nce n ks
No e al . Or p. Drop MATE e er Dia “P” e Pat All z Spa Isometr e
N Pipe Wal “ΔP” RIAL Di Of “d” Th tern Len e cing ic S
o (inche l a Hol k. (ST gth “ “L” Drawin p
s) Thk “ es D S g e
. D “N” or ” Numbe c
” Off r
set)
ATTACHMENT “1”
155
C “t” L C L
“P” 1/2 “P”
“D” +0.00
30O (NOTE 2)
L L
-0.07
(typ)
C
60O
“x” C
“X” “P” “X”
(typ) “X”
“P”
10mm RADIUS DRAIN HOLE
STANDARD HOLE PATTERN OFFSET HOLE PATTERN

(SCHEMATIC) (SCHEMATIC)
PLATE FABRICATION DETAIL
See weld detail PLATE n
FLOW C L “S”
TYPE “A” WELD
PLATE 1
“L” PIPING BY OTHERS
75mm min. (TYP)
(TYP) “OAL”
PLATE 2
“S”
PLATE INSTALLATION TYPE “B” WELD
DETAIL
ATTACHMENT “2”
FABRICATION NOTES
The fabricator shall lay out the holePattern specified on the data sheet. Only the required number of holes shall be drilled (or punched). ThoseIntersections points left
undrilled shall be distributed at the outermost portion of the plate so as to preserve the general summary.
The offset hole pattern where specifiedShall be identical to the standard holepattern except that it shall be offset from the “X-X” axis by a distance of one half pitch.
The fabricator shall attach to each plate a removable weatherproof tag labelled with the plate tag number.
INSTALLATION NOTES
156
13.24.0 A Simplified Method for Piping Designers to Asses Piping Flexibility.
13.24.1 This method to be employed is simple, quick, and conservative, but does not
consider equipment loads. This is not seen as a problem as the Stress Engineers
will cover this check during their review of the piping.
13.24.2 The equation is based on the guided cantilever method.
13.24.3 To calculate the required leg, use the following Equation:
(see also fig 5.1)
Lr = K. (D.T.Le)1/2
Where Lr = Required leg to absorb expansion of Le. (mm) (in)
D = Pipe Actual OD in inches (of Lr) (in) (in)
T = Pipe Design Temperature - 10°C (50°F) (°C) (°F)
Le = Length of pipe that is expanding. (mm) (in)
K = Constant see Para. 13.24.4
13.24.4 Values of the constant K:

Material Value of K in:
Imperial Units SI Units
except NB
Carbon Steel & Low Alloy Steel
to 5Cr Steel 0.185 1.25
12 Cr Steel and Austenitic 0.21 1.4
Stainless Steels (Not L grade)
Fig. 5.1
Diagram Showing Expansion of Typical 'L' Shape

13.24.5 METHOD LIMITATIONS
13.24.5.1 This equation becomes less accurate for pipes in the following categories:
a) Lines with a Le/D ratio less than 5
b) non-metallic Piping
c) Using the K values given for Pipes at Temperatures over 300°C (572°F).
d) Pipe runs with changes in diameter in length Lr.
13.24.5.2 This method is based on allowable piping stress. It does not consider imposed
moments on anchor points or equipment nozzles.
Hence for sensitive equipment, this method is only a first pass method for t he
designer to get a feeling of the sort of leg sizes that are required.
13.24.3 Pipe Loops
When there are long runs of pipe, such as in a pipe rack, the expansion of the
pipes must be absorbed at regular intervals to prevent excessive movement at the
ends.
This is achieved by the use of pipe loops:
Preliminary loop sizing can be approximated in a similar way to the method
described previously for the "L" shape. (section 5.3)
Normally loops are designed as "square": i.e. the distance between the legs is the
same as the length of the legs. (See fig 6.8.3)
To calculate the required leg, use the following Equation:
Lr = K. (D.T.Le)1/2
Where: Lr = Required leg to absorb expansion of Le. (mm)

(in)
(2 legs required per loop)
D = Pipe Actual OD in inches (of Lr) (in) (in)
T = Pipe Design Temperature - 10°C (50°F) (°C)(°F)
Le = Length of pipe that is expanding. (mm)(in)
K = Constant see below:
Values of the constant K:

Material Value of K in:
Imperial Units SI Units
except NB
Carbon Steel & Low Alloy Steel
to 5Cr Steel 0.09 0.625
12 Cr Steel and Austenitic 0.11 0.7
Stainless Steels (Not L grade)
Diagram Showing Expansion of Loop
13.25.1.0 DEFINITIONS
13.25.1.1 Open Discharge System
An open discharge system is an installation where the fluid is discharged to the atmosphere
through the discharge piping system as shown Figure 1 (page 4).
13.25.1.2 ASME Open Discharge System (ASME B31.1)
An ASME open discharge system is an open discharge system as shown in Figure 2 (page 4).
The maximum value of "L" shall be limited to a value less than or equal to 4Do and that of "M"
shall be limited to a value less than or equal to 6Do where Do is the outside diameter of the
discharge pipe.
13.25.1.3 Closed Discharge System
A closed discharge system is an installation where the fluid is carried to a distant location by
discharge pipe which is connected directly to the safety valve as shown in Figure 3 (page 5).
13.25.2.0 REACTION FORCE IN AN ASME OPEN DISCHARGE SYSTEM (ASME B31.1)
The unbalanced reaction force, F, at the discharge elbow of an ASME open discharge system as
shown in Figure 2, due to the steady state flow following the opening of the safety valve, consists
of forces due to both the momentum and pressure effects and can be given by the following
formula:
F = DLF [ W x Ve + ( Pe - Pa ) x A ] (1)
Where:
F = reaction force, N
DLF = dynamic load factor = 2.
W = mass flow rate, kg/sec.
Ve = exit velocity at point "e", metre/sec.
Pe = static pressure at point "e", N/mm2.
Pa = atmospheric pressure at point "e",. N/mm2.
A = exit flow area at point "e", mm2.

13.25.3.0 REACTION FORCE IN AN OPEN DISCHARGE SYSTEM
13.25.3.1 Steady State Condition
The unbalanced reaction force, F, at the elbow nearest to the open end of an open discharge
system as shown in Figure 1, due to the steady state flow following the opening of the safety
valve, consists of forces due to both the momentum and pressure effects and can be given by
Equation (1) above.
13.25.3.2 Transient Condition
Until the steady state condition is established, there will be transient forces acting at elbows or
bends (except the elbow nearest to the open end) of the discharge pipe system.
In the absence of a detailed analysis, the force calculated for the steady state condition can be
used as the transient force for pipe support design; the transient force for each pipe segment
(between the valve and the nearest elbow or between consecutive elbows) acts in the opposite
direction of flow and along the longitudinal axis of the pipe.
13.25.4.0 REACTION FORCE IN A CLOSED DISCHARGE SYSTEM
13.25.4.1 Steady State Condition
When a safety valve discharges in a closed piping system, the forces acting on the system under
steady state flow will be self-equilibrated, and do not create significant forces and moments on
the piping system and can be ignored however if it is uncertain that steady state conditions exist
then use the formula given in 13.25.4.2.
13.25.4.2 Transient Condition
Until the steady state condition is established, there will be transient forces acting at elbows of
the discharge pipe system.
The transient force can be calculated by equation (2):
Ft = 2(WxV) (2)
Ft = transient force, N.
W = gas flow rate, kg/sec.
V = flow velocity at relief valve outlet flange, metre/sec.
In the absence of a detailed analysis, the above force can be used for pipe support design; it can
be assumed to act in the opposite direction of flow and along the longitudinal axis of each pipe
segment (between the valve and the nearest elbow or between consecutive elbows).
13.25.5.0 SUPPORT DESIGN FOR THE TRANSIENT FORCE
13.25.5.1 Work Group Leader must be consulted when there is difficulty in providing supports f
or transient forces.
13.25.5.2 The transient force can be neglected in any pipe segment with length less than or
equal to 4Do where Do is the pipe outside the diameter.
13.25.6.0 DATA FOR THE REACTION FORCE CALCULATIONS
Data for the reaction force calculation is given in the attached form on page 14 provided by the
Systems Engineering Technology. Note that for the open discharge system, the static pressure at
pipe exit can be equal to the atmospheric pressure. This will happen when the velocity at pipe
exit is equal to or less than sonic velocity.
13.25.7.0 PIPING CONFIGURATION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The branch connection up stream of a relief valve shall be reinforced. The pipe ends at exhaust
points on open discharge relief valve systems shall be perpendicular to the pipe axis as shown in
Figure 2, pipe ends shall not be cut off at an angle.
13.25.8.0 ACOUSTICALLY INDUCED VIBRATIONS IN PIPING SYSTEMS
The possibility of fatigue failures in piping systems downstream of pressure relief valves resulting
from flow induced vibrations are the result of the energy generated in the highly turbulent flow
region just downstream of a pressure reduction device. This highly turbulent flow is characterized
by high noise levels (noise levels are calculated by Systems and/or Environmental), and any
resulting vibration in the piping is commonly referred to as ACOUSTICALLY induced vibration."
If the acoustically induced vibration is severe, fatigue failures can result. Guidelines have been
established for avoiding fatigue failures resulting from acoustically induced vibration in pressure
relief systems and pressure letdown systems, these guidelines are set forth in Haliburton Chief
Engineers Office Memo No. 50 (appendix “A”).
DISCHAR
GE
PIPE
OUTL
ET
FLAN
GE M≤
6Do
INLET
FLANGE
INLET
PIPE
L≤4
BRANCH Do
CONNECTION
RUN
PIPE
OPEN DISCHARGE
SYSTEM
Do
APPENDIX “A”
SUBJECT: Criteria for Avoiding Fatigue Failures from

Acoustically Induced Vibration in Piping Systems
DISTRIBUTION:
M. A. Aldag J. L. Rose M. J. Van Sickels

R. G. Glash H. Aragon S. P. Watson
P. F. O'Leary D. W. Graves D. Wilson - MWKL
M. L. Rich B. S. Landry
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Recently, we were required to address the possibility of fatigue failures in piping systems
downstream of pressure relief valves resulting from flow induced vibrations. These flow induced
vibrations are the result of the energy generated in the highly turbulent flow region just
downstream of a pressure reduction device. This highly turbulent flow is characterized by high
noise levels, and any resulting vibration in the piping is commonly referred to as "acoustically
induced vibration". If the vibration is severe, fatigue failures can result.
In order be proactive in the consideration of this phenomenon, which has caused failures as
reported in the open literature, guidelines have been established for the avoiding fatigue failures
resulting from acoustic induced vibration in pressure relief systems and pressure letdown
systems. This criteria is attached for your information and use.
The implementation of these guidelines requires a multi-disciplinary approach that involves the
P&IDs, piping isometrics, pipe support details, and the detailed pipe specifications. The MWK
noise specialist is expected to provide a coordinating role in the implementation of these
guidelines. It is expected that the requirements of these guidelines will be implemented in our
normal work processes. It will be very important to identify early in the project those services
where there is a possibility of acoustic induced vibration. Where it is identified that fatigue failures
are possible, the appropriate design details provided in the guideline shall be incorporated.
It is the responsibility of the Chief Technology Engineers from the affected disciplines to
incorporate the provisions of these guidelines into their work processes. If there are any
questions related to this issue, please advise me.
U. R. Miller, P. E., Chief Engineer

Extension 7393
Attachments
Attachment1
Attachment 2
Attachment 2a
ATTACHMENT (1)
Guidelines for the Avoidance of Fatigue

Failures From Acoustic Induced Vibration
in Pressure Relief Systems
and Pressure Letdown Systems
Background:
CONCAWE Report No. 85/52, "Acoustic Fatigue in Pipes" summarizes the experience related to
mechanical failures resulting from flow induced vibrations that have been reported from time to
time in the technical literature. These flow induced vibrations result from the energy generated in
the highly turbulent flow region just downstream from a pressure reduction device. This highly
turbulent flow is characterized by high noise levels, and any resulting vibration is commonly
referred to as acoustically induced vibration. When acoustically induced vibration levels have
been significant, fatigue failures have resulted within a very short time period. The reported
failures range from large fans in nuclear power stations to pipes in oil and gas installations.
It is significant to note that all the reported failures have occurred at geometric asymmetries and
stress raisers in the piping system. That is, fatigue failures due to acoustic induced vibrations
have been at branch connections, small vent and drain connections, pipe support and guide
locations. The data presented in the CONCAWE report shows only one failure in the straight pipe
section, and this was attributable to a severe weld undercut.
Fatigue failures resulting from acoustically induced vibration can occur in piping systems when
upstream valves and/or restriction orifices have high gas flow rates and large pressure drops.
Large capacity pressure relief and vent systems, pressure let down systems, and recycle
systems are potentially susceptible to mechanical failure resulting from acoustic induced
vibrations.
This guide provides criteria to be applied in order to assure that fatigue failures in such systems
do not result from acoustic induced vibrations. The implementation of this criteria requires a
multi-disciplinary approach that involves the P&IDs, piping isometrics, pipe support details, and
the detailed pipe specifications. The noise specialist would be expected to have a coordinating
role, including any interface with consultants.
Pressure Letdown, Depressuring, Venting, and Recycle Systems
The phenomenon of noise generation at control valves is reasonably well understood and
documented. There are low noise design control valves available that should be considered
when noise levels are excessive. Control Valve Specification O40-1E-83, Para. 2.1.15 states, "If
the noise level...will exceed 90dBA at a position one meter downstream of the valve and one
meter from the pipe.....the seller shall inform the purchaser and make recommendations to
reduce the noise level." For very high noise levels, it is expected that a valve with a "quiet" trim
will be specified rather than acoustically insulating the valve and downstream piping. While this
requirement for control valves is intended to limit personnel exposure to high noise levels, it also
provides protection from acoustically induced vibrations. It should be noted that Fisher Control
Valves do not recommend sound pressure levels greater than 110 dBA at one meter since high
vibrations can result which can cause damage to the valve and the downstream piping. (Ref:
Fisher Catalog 10 "Noise Abatement", February 1984.) Care should be taken to distinguish
between valve designs that reduce noise and those that merely shift the peak frequency upwards
to where it is less audible.
Critical pressure drops at flow discontinuities shall be avoided (i.e. at branch connections).
If any downstream piping from a control valve, emergency depressuring valve, manual and
automatic process vent valve, or a compressor recycle valve, is NPS 10 or larger, the sound
power level shall be determined from Equation 1 in the Appendix.
Using the calculated internal pipe sound power level and the largest size pipe exposed to the
noise source downstream of the valve, enter Figure 1 - Acoustic Vibration Criteria given in the
Appendix. (Note: this Figure is to be used for all materials of construction.)
If the predicted internal pipe sound power level from the valve falls above Curve A of Figure 1,
then a valve that incorporates a "quiet" trim or a series of restriction orifices shall be used in order
to provide the necessary protection against fatigue failure of the downstream piping from
acoustic induced vibrations. This requirement does not in any way supersede any requirements
that may be applicable because of personnel noise protection.
Pressure Relief Systems
Pressure relief valves with a quiet trim are not available. Thus, pressure relieving devices present
a special challenge when considering acoustically generated (flow induced) vibrations in the
downstream piping.
Guidelines are needed to assure the integrity of relief systems with large orifice sizes which yield
high flow rates combined with large pressure drops.
For all relief systems, the steady state gas flow velocity in the downstream pipes (remote from
the valve) of pressure relief systems shall be limited such that no critical pressure drops are
developed. Particular attention is required to avoid critical pressure drops at flow discontinuities
(i.e. branch connections).
Downstream piping smaller than NPS 10 does not require special considerations for avoiding
acoustic induced fatigue failures. It is generally recognized that such failures have not occurred
in pipe sizes smaller than NPS 10.
Downstream piping NPS 10 or larger for safety relief valves shall be investigated to determine if
the flow induced (acoustic) energy levels are of a magnitude where experience has shown there
is a potential for fatigue failures at asymmetric discontinuities. The internal pipe sound power
level shall be determined from Equation 1 in the Appendix.
The calculated internal pipe sound power level is to be compared to the curves given in Figure 1
- Acoustic Vibration Criteria given in the Appendix. (Note: these curves are applicable for all
materials of construction.)
Using the calculated internal pipe sound power level and the largest pipe size in the downstream
system that is subjected to the noise source, enter Figure 1. Apply the following criteria to the
piping system as far as the knock-out drum/tower. The drum or tower will provide attenuation of
the vibrations, and there is no need to apply the criteria to the piping beyond.
If the sound power level - pipe size point is below Curve A, no additional consideration is required
for acoustic induced fatigue considerations.
If the point is between Curve A and Curve B, then apply the following guidelines:
Use bolted on pipe supports or weld the pipe support clips and guides to a full circumferential
band that is attached to the pipe.
It is preferred that vents and drains be eliminated downstream of the relief valve. However, when
they cannot be totally eliminated, provide appropriate support for these small fittings, or remove
the valve and nipple after the system hydrotest and replace with a seal welded plug. Small bore
(less than 2 NPS) branches shall be Class 6000 socket welded couplings.
Use relief valve discharge piping with a diameter to thickness ratio of no more than 72. This
diameter to thickness ratio shall be maintained for a distance of no less than 100 diameters away
from the noise source.
If the point falls above Curve B, then apply the following guidelines in addition to those listed
above:
Advise the Job Leader that a potential for acoustic induced vibration exists. A full review, and a
potential redesign, of the affected system should be conducted with consultation with a noise
specialist and the Office of the Chief Engineer. This review should consider all possible options to
define provisions to be implemented in order to reduce the risk of a fatigue failure from acoustic
induced vibrations. Some considerations for action will include:
Use more relief valves such that each valve has a smaller capacity.
Avoid asymmetric piping connections and supports.
Use full wrap around reinforcement at branch connection, or change to a thicker pipe section
locally, or use forgings where appropriate. Alternatively, use 45 degree branch connections to
improve the integrity of the system.
Use stiffening rings at points of supports and restraint for pipes greater than NPS 24.
Use relief valve discharge piping with a diameter to thickness ratio of no more than 72. This
diameter to thickness ratio shall be maintained for a distance of no less than 200 diameters away
from of the noise source.
General
Most of the above criteria is based on the data contained in ASME Paper 82-WA/PVP-8
"Acoustically Induced Piping Vibration in High Capacity Pressure Reducing Systems" by V. A.
Carucci and R. T. Mueller. This paper is given in Appendix 1 to CONCAWE Report No. 85/52.
This paper provides a plot (Fig. 3) of observed fatigue failures resulting from acoustically induced
vibrations as a function of sound power level and pipe size. This paper presents a
"Recommended Design Limit" for use in continuous pressure letdown service.
A review of the information associated with the failure points and design limit given in this plot
indicate that the design curve was somewhat arbitrarily drawn below the lowest failure point. The
failure associated with the single lowest point used to define the design curve was at a pipe
guide and at a small pressure tap. The other failures represented in the figure are considerably
above the failure point that defines the design limit. It is estimated that the design limit curve can
be moved upward approximately 7.3 dB if this point is not included.
Thus, the basis of Figure 1 "Acoustic Design Criteria" is experience, as documented by the
above referenced paper, that shows small connections and pipe guides/supports may be subject
to fatigue failures resulting from acoustically induced vibrations when the sound power level for a
given pipe size exceeds Curve A. Curve B represents the 7.3 dB shift when considering the other
more notable failures. This procedure is deemed to be appropriate for those non-continuous
pressure let down services such as pressure relief systems.
ATTACHMENT 2
Equation 1 (US Customary Units):
Lw = 10Log10[(W)2(ΔP/P1)3.6(T/MW)1.2] + 45
Where:
Lw = internal pipe sound power level

W = Flow rate of the gas (lbs/hr)
ΔP = P1 - P2 = Total Pressure drop across valve (psi)
P1 = Upstream pressure (psia)
P2 = Downstream pressure (psia)
T = Temperature of upstream gas (deg R)
MW = Molecular weight of flowing gas
or (Metric Units)
LW = 10Log 10[(W)2(ΔP/P 1)3.6(T/MW)1.2] + 55
Where:
Lw = internal pipe sound power level

W = Flow rate of the gas (kg/hr)
ΔP = P1 - P2 = Total Pressure drop across valve (Bar)
P1 = Upstream pressure (Bar abs)
P2 = Downstream pressure (Bar abs)
T = Temperature of upstream gas (deg K)
MW = Molecular weight of flowing gas
ATTACHMENT 2a
PAGE NO.
JOB NO.
CLIENT.
LOCATION
RELIEF VALVE No. P & ID No. FLOWRATE VELOCITY(1) PRESSURE(2) AREA(2) REV
kg/S m/S N/mm2 mm2 NO
RELIEF VALVE REACTION FORCES

DATA SHEET
Figure SEQ
Figure \*
ARABIC 6
NOTES:
1. Velocity is at pipe exit for open discharge systems or at relief valve outlet flange for closed discharge systems.
2. Static pressure at pipe exit area is not required for closed discharge systems.
3. For relief valve with double outlet use total area.
NO. 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8
IS
S
DATE
U BY
E
O CHK.
R
R APPD.
E
V
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
NUMBER
13.26.1 Support requirements
13.26.2 Support - Yard Planning
13.26.3 Span Tables
13.26.4 Imposed Loads On Horizontal Lines
13.26.5 Typical piping diagrams - support locations
13.26.6 Vertical guide spacing for compression members.
13.26.7 Guide spacing for wind vibration
13.26.8 Design of pipe attachments
13.26.9 Weld stress formulas
13.26.10 Overhang variation for horizontal lines
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
NUMBER
13.26.1 Support requirements
13.26.2 Support - Yard Planning
13.26.3 Span Tables
13.26.4 Imposed Loads On Horizontal Lines
13.26.5 Typical piping diagrams - support locations
13.26.6 Vertical guide spacing for compression members.
13.26.7 Guide spacing for wind vibration
13.26.8 Design of pipe attachments
13.26.9 Weld stress formulas
13.26.10 Overhang variation for horizontal lines
SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Introduction:
A piping system may properly be described as an irregular space frame and because of its
slender proportions, may not be self-supporting; therefore, it may need to be restrained or
braced. Thermal expansion and, external forces such as wind or weight, internal pulsations, etc.
can introduce stresses into the system which may require additional supports or restraints.
The analysis of thermal effects in piping systems has limited value unless it is used in conjunction
with the type and location of the supports used. Accurate formal calculations are not necessary
for most piping systems.
Satisfactory design for the average piping can be done by approximation. (For Flexibility Review
Requirements see Section 13.0).
Supports, restraints, braces, etc. are required to hold up the weight of the piping system as well
as to prevent harmful effects of movement due to wind forces or internal pulsations. They are
also used to direct and control thermal expansion or contraction of the system so that the system
is not overstressed.
Layout study of equipment and structural locations is essential for the most effective design of
the primary piping and its associated supports. In addition to establishing the general
arrangement and overall design conditions, early decisions must be reached as to the type and
method of supporting the critical piping.
Design Considerations:
The general considerations affecting the routing of the piping for the best support design are as
follows:
1. The piping system should be self-supporting insofar as practical and consistent with flexibility
requirements.
2. Excess flexibility in a piping system should be avoided because it will normally add additional
pipe, fittings and supports, consequently increasing the cost unnecessarily.
3. Expansion joints should be avoided unless they are absolutely required.
4. Piping systems that are subject to vibration, such as reciprocating suction and discharge
piping, should be routed to allow for independent supports. The routing should permit the
use of resting or similar type supports so that the pipe may be anchored or stopped at these
points in order to restrict the movement of the pipe and help dampen the vibration. Hanging
type supports should always be avoided in vibrating systems.
5. The lines should be run sufficiently close to a point of support so that the pipe support at a
structure can have adequate strength and the detail can be simple and economical.
6. Piping from upper connections on vertical vessels should be supported from the vessel as
close to the nozzle as possible in order to minimise the relative thermal expansion between
the nozzles and the supports. In order to make the supporting and guiding of lines easier,
multiple lines should run close to the vessel and be grouped where practical,
7. Piping in structures should be routed beneath platforms and near major structural members
at locations that are more capable of carrying the added load. This often eliminates the
necessity of making these members heavier.
8. Sufficient space should be allowed, so that proper support assembly details may be
accommodated.
9. Sufficient access clearance must be provided when the support contains parts that
require maintenance.
10. Preferred points of attachment to the piping are:
a. On the pipe rather than on the piping components such as valves, separators,
etc. Attachments to heavy components may be acceptable where the effect of pipe weight on
component nozzles can be properly accommodated.
b. On straight runs of pipe rather than on bends or elbows, since they are already
subjected to localized stresses on which the local effects of the attachment would be
superimposed and would also reduce the flexibility of the system.
c. On the pipe runs which do not require frequent removal for cleaning or
maintenance.
d. As close as practical to heavy load concentrations such as vertical runs, branch

lines, motor operated or otherwise heavy valves, separators, strainers, etc.
11. Undesirable effects of piping reactions on foundations, structures, buildings, equipment or
vessels can be minimized by locating supports as follows:'
a. Apply loads to columns and beams near main-member intersections to minimize bending
effects.
b. Avoid the imposing of unnecessary torsion or lateral bending effects.
c. Avoid the introduction of moments or transverse loading to slender members, such as

wind bracing and particularly to compression members.
d. Confine connections to independent structures or Foundations when supporting piping

that is subject to pulsating flow or transmitted mechanical vibration. A very careful and
comprehensive analysis should be made to assure that the structures, buildings, etc.
are of adequate strength with a non-resonant natural frequency and sufficient stiffness
to control the amplitude of the vibration.
e. Provide appropriate anchors, guides and flexible piping to sensitive equipment such as
Air Coolers (Section 13.6), Centrifugal Compressors (Section 13.10), Pumps (Section
13.16), Turbines (Section 13.12) and Blowers (Section 13.13) and other types of
equipment (Generally covered by Sections 13.1 to 13.15.).
f. Provide appropriate anchors, guides and dampening devices such as snubbers, volume
bottles or desurgers to piping connected to reciprocating pumps or compressors (see
Sections 13.11 and 13.18).
12. Every effort should be made to use the standard pipe support drawings. Making special
pipe support drawings is time consuming and costly.
13. Any special pipe support requirements will be included in the Design Criteria addenda of
each job.
14. The horizontal force caused by the frictional resistance of the resting type supports due to
thermal movement is equal to 30% of the vertical load.
15. In places where there are a large number of lines resting on the same support, such as a
yard bent, the horizontal friction force should be 10% of the total weight of all the lines or
30% of the largest line, whichever is greater.
I. YARD PLANNING COMMENTS N
00
(TYPE COLS 1 & 2 )
1
EL 121’-4”
EL 121’-0”
2
9” typ. (TYP. @ EACH BENT)
PLA
N
ABO STL. BY C.E.D.
VE T.O.S. EL. 124’-0”
EL. 4 VL. = 1.0K (TOTAL)
121’-
0”
5
MIN. OVERHANG = ELBOW RAD. + 1’-
0”
6
(TYPE. COLS 3 &
6 )
7 STL. BY C.E.D.
T.O.S. EL 124’-0”
V.L. = 1.5K (TOTAL)
8
NOTE OR COMMENT TO C.E.D. IS
NOT
NECESSARY IF NET LOAD DOES NOT
EXCEED LOADS AGREED TO, BY
P.M.P.E. AND C.E.P.E.
1.0K 1.0K
Note - K = 4450N
0.5K H.L. (N-S/E-W)

C.E.D. NOTE
1.0K H.L.
EL. 112’-0”
(N-S/E-W) 2.0K H.L. (N-S/E-W)
H.L. = 2.8K (E-
W)
TRUN. BY
P.MECH
BATTERY LIMIT
N
00
C.E.D. NOTE
H.L. =AS
NOTED
PLA
N@ STL. BY C.E.D.
EL. T.O.S. EL. 112’-0”
115’- V.L. = =3k (TOTAL)
0”
PUMP LINE
II SLEEPER PLANNING COMMENTS
N
0O
3.3K (T +F)
1.0K (T)
1.0K (T)
TO TANKS
C.E.D. NOTE
T.O.S EL. 606’-0”
H.L. = AS NOTE
(N-S)
STOPS BY
P.MECH.
4”
8”
105’
-0” 10”
2440mm
TO TANKS
1.0K (T)
(T) 0.5K 1.0K (T)
3.3K (T+F)BY C.E.D.
SUPPORT
PIPING
T.O.S. EL.- ADD
606’-0”
DIKE
V.L. = CENTRE
LOOPS 2K (TOTAL)
LINE
EL. 606’-0“
4”
8”
10”
NOTE;-
ADDITIONAL SUPPORT(T) = THERMAL
STEEL AS REQUIRED. (F) = FRICTION
h/2
ELEV. II
h/2 ELEV. IA
h/2
h/2 SPANDREL
h BEAMS
(CONTINUOUS)
ELEV. IA
ELEV. IB
SPANDREL BEAMS
(ONLY WHEN
REQUIRED)
YARD COLUMN
GRADE
C.E.D. NOTE
T.O.S. EL 606’-0”
H.L. = AS NOTED (N-
YARD SECTION S)
NOTE: DIMENSION “h” IS SET
BY PLANNING SECTION
YARD SECTION
NOTES
1. Continuous spandrel beams should be at Elev. IA (Pipes leaving down from Elev. II and
up from Elev. I may rest on this spandrel and lines leaving down from Elev. I may be hung
from this spandrel beam. )
2. Spandrel beams at Elev. IB shouild be added only for multiple lines (4 or more) entering
and leaving the yard at this elevation in one bay.
3. Do Not use spandrel beams as a stop or anchor point. Instead route line close to yard
column and with trunnion and use the yard column for stop point.
4. Allowable Horizontal Loads - These are to be set by the Piping Mechanical Group
Supervisor and the Civil Engineering Principal Engineer previous to job start. In general,
these loads will be as follows:
a. Process Units - net longitudinal anchor or stop load at each beam level. Elev. I &II.
will be designed for 11120 N or 2.5K. Each yard bent will also be designed for a net
transverse load of 6670 N or 1. 5K.
b. Offsite Area 3 - same as process units except for "T" type supports. For "T"
supports, consult C. E. D.
NET ALLOWABLE STOP OR ANCHOR LOADS

∑ PL = PL1 – PL2 ≤ 11120 N. PER BEAM
∑ PT = PT1 – PT2 ≤ 6770 N. PER BENT
PLPL1
2
PT
1
PT
2
Span Tables
13.26.3.1 Basic Data For Pipe Span Calculations
The requirements for calculating the maximum pipe support spacing (pipe span) are as follows.
Note that spans should be calculated separately for deflection and stress. The shorter of the two
is the maximum allowable span.
13.26.3.1 Determine the total unit weight (W) in Kg/m. This is the sum of:
a. Pipe weight (based on non-corroded thickness)
b. Weight of water
c. Weight of insulation
13.26.3.2 Determine values of moment of inertia (I) in mm 4 and section modulus (Z) in mm3
based on the corroded thickness of the pipe.
13.26.3.3 The allowable tensile stress used in making weight calculations should be taken as
1/2 of the allowable hot stress (Sh) in N/mm2 as given in ASME/ANSI B31.3 (code
for pressure piping) for the material and temperature indicated. This allows for a
pipe internal pressure (which gives a hoop stress of Sh) and a longitudinal stress of
1/2(Sh).
13.30.1.4 The allowable span (L) in metres based on stress is obtained from the formula
below:
L=
This stress equation is based on a semi-restrained continuous beam with a

maximum moment equal to 0.10WL2 (with end moments =0.025WL2).
13.26.3.5 Determine the modulus of elasticity (Eh) for the pipe material at design
temperature.
13.26.3.6 The allowable span (L) in metres based on deflection is obtained from the formula
below. The normal limit of deflection (d) in mm is approximately 16mm for lines
inside battery limits and 38mm for lines outside battery limits.
L=
13.26.3.7 An important reason for limiting deflection is to make the pipe stiff enough, i.e., of
high enough natural frequency, to avoid large amplitude response by any slight
perturbing force. For the average pipe a natural frequency (Fn) of 4 cycles per
second should be used.
13.26.3.8 The formula for the relationship between pipe deflection (d) and natural frequency
(Fn) is as follows:
Fn = or d =
By substituting Fn = 4 CPS in the above equation, d = 15.55mm, which is

approximately the deflection limit stated in Item 6. (For lines inside battery limits).
13.26.3.9 The allowable load per linear (F) that a pipe can withstand to prevent flattening, is
calculated as follows:
F=
(correct formula is currently being checked)
where,
t = Corroded wall thickness of pipe in inches
D = Outside diameter of pipe in inches
Sh = Hot allowable stress of the pipe in pounds per square inch

TABLE OF BASIC SPANS AND UNIT LINE WEIGHTS – WITHIN BATTERY
LIMITS
PIPE + VAPOUR + INSULATION PIPE + LIQUID + INSULATION BARE PIPE BARE PIPE
EMPTY WATER
-FILLED
PIPE SCH CORR Up to 350OF 351O – 600OF 601O – 750OF Up to 350OF 351O – 600OF 601O – 750OF Up to 350OF Up to 350OF PIPE
SIZE ALLOW Up to 176.7OC (177O –315.6OC) (316O –399OC) Up to 176.7OC (177O –315.6OC) (316O –399OC) Up to 176.7OC Up to 176.7OC SIZE
IN mm SPAN WT SPAN WT SPAN WT SPAN WT SPAN WT SPAN WT SPAN WT SPAN WT IN
Metres Kg/m Metres Kg/m Metres Kg/m Metres Kg/m Metres Kg/m Metres Kg/m Metres Kg/m Metres Kg/m
3/4 40 1.27 3.66 2.60 3.35 3.72 2.44* 6.44 3.66 2.95 3.05* 4.06 2.13* 6.78 4.27 1.68 3.96 2.02 3/4
1 40 1.27 4.27 3.53 3.96 4.81 3.05* 7.62 4.27 4.08 3.66 5.36 2.74* 8.17 4.88 2.50 4.27 3.05 1
1-1/2 40 1.27 5.49 5.33 4.88 6.71 4.27* 10.07 5.18 6.64 4.57 8.02 3.66* 11.38 5.79 4.05 5.18 5.34 1-1/2
2 40 2.54 5.49 7.29 4.88 10.06 3.35* 15.04 5.18 9.45 4.57 12.07 3.35* 17.20 6.40 5.43 5.49 7.59 2
2-1/2 40 2.54 7.01 10.74 5.79 13.76 4.88* 17.90 5.79 13.82 5.49 16.84 4.57* 20.98 7.62 8.61 6.40 11.69 2-1/2
3 40 2.54 7.32 13.73 6.40 17.04 5.49* 23.11 6.40 18.49 5.79 21.86 4.88* 27.87 7.92 11.26 6.71 16.02 3
4 40 2.54 8.23 19.39 7.62 22.91 6.71 30.55 7.32 27.57 7.01 31.11 5.79* 38.76 8.84 16.05 7.62 24.25 4
6 40 2.54 10.06 32.87 9.45 40.25 8.53 47.76 8.84 51.21 8.23 58.59 7.62* 66.39 10.36 28.23 8.84 46.57 6
8 40 2.54 11.89 49.03 10.97 57.08 10.06 66.51 10.06 81.17 9.75 89.22 8.84* 98.77 12.19 42.48 10.06 74.62 8
10 40 2.54 13.41 68.10 12.80 77.67 11.89 90.46 11.28 118.85 10.67 128.42 10.36* 141.32 14.02 60.23 11.58 110.98 10
12 3/8"W 2.54 14.33 85.00 13.72 93.89 12.80 107.96 11.89 157.96 11.58 166.84 10.97* 180.91 14.94 73.80 12.19 146.56 12
14 3/8"W 2.54 14.94 93.92 14.33 102.67 13.41 119.03 12.19 182.75 11.89 192.27 11.28* 207.94 15.85 81.84 12.50 170.66 14
16 3/8"W 2.54 16.15 107.43 15.24 117.10 14.33 136.14 12.80 224.97 12.50 234.82 11.89* 253.87 16.76 93.74 13.11† 211.43 16
18 3/8"W 2.54 17.07 120.82 16.46 132.42 15.24 152.81 13.41 271.39 13.11 283.00 12.19* 302.82 17.98 105.64 13.72† 256.22 18
20 3/8"W 2.54 17.98 134.21 17.37 146.11 16.15 169.62 14.02 321.69 13.72 333.10 12.50* 356.61 18.90 117.54 14.02† 305.02 20
24 3/8"W 2.54 19.81 160.99 18.90 175.28 17.68 202.80 14.63 434.47 14.33 449.50 13.11* 476.50 20.73† 141.35 14.94† 414.83 24
3/4 80 2.54 3.66 3.11 3.05 4.18 2.13* 6.95 3.35 3.39 3.05 4.51 1.83* 7.23 4.27 2.19 3.96 2.47 3/4
1 80 2.54 4.27 4.26 3.66 5.54 3.05* 8.35 3.96 4.72 3.66 6.16 2.74* 8.90 4.88 3.23 4.27 3.69 1
1-1/2 80 2.54 5.18 6.68 4.88 8.06 4.27* 11.43 4.88 7.83 4.57 9.21 3.96* 12.57 5.79 5.40 5.18 6.55 1-1/2
2 80 2.54 5.79 9.33 5.18 12.10 4.27* 17.08 5.49 11.23 4.88 14.00 3.96* 18.99 6.40 7.47 5.79 9.37 2
2-1/2 80 2.54 6.71 13.53 6.10 16.55 5.49 20.53 6.10 16.25 5.79 19.27 5.18* 23.40 7.01 11.40 6.40 14.12 2-1/2
3 80 2.54 7.32 17.72 6.71 21.08 6.10 27.17 6.71 21.98 6.40 25.34 5.79 31.42 7.62 15.25 7.01 19.51 3
4 80 2.54 8.23 25.61 7.92 29.15 7.01 36.28 7.62 33.02 7.32 36.56 6.71 43.69 8.84 22.29 7.92 29.70 4
6 80 2.54 10.36 47.20 9.75 54.56 9.14 61.30 9.45 63.99 8.84 71.36 8.53 78.84 10.67 42.55 9.45 58.61 6
8 1/2"W 2.54 11.89 71.12 11.28 79.19 10.67 88.53 10.67 100.57 10.06 108.63 9.75 117.98 12.19 64.58 10.97 94.01 8
10 1/2"W 2.54 13.41 89.41 12.80 98.95 11.89 111.74 11.58 137.54 11.28 147.08 10.67 159.88 13.72 81.54 11.89 129.67 10
12 1/2"W 2.54 14.33 108.54 13.72 117.29 13.11 132.01 12.50 178.49 12.19 187.30 11.58 201.51 14.94 97.34 12.80 167.29 12
14 1/2"W 2.54 15.24 119.36 14.63 128.70 13.72 145.07 12.80 204.97 12.50 214.32 12.19 230.69 15.54 107.28 13.41 192.89 14
16 1/2"W 2.54 16.15 136.83 15.54 147.15 14.94 166.20 13.41 250.77 13.11 261.10 12.80 280.14 16.76 123.20 14.02† 223.75 16
18 1/2"W 2.54 17.37 154.30 16.76 165.90 15.85 187.18 14.33 300.72 14.02 312.33 13.41 333.31 17.98 139.12 14.63† 285.54 18
20 1/2"W 2.54 17.98 173.04 17.37 185.39 16.76 208.90 14.94 355.86 14.33 368.21 14.02 391.72 18.90 156.23 14.94† 339.05 20
24 1/2"W 2.54 19.81 206.52 19.20 221.10 18.29 248.63 15.85 474.54 15.24 489.12 14.94 516.65 20.73† 186.73 15.85† 454.75 24
1 XXS 6.35 4.27 6.62 3.96 7.75 3.05* 10.56 3.96 6.80 3.66 7.93 3.05* 10.83 4.57 5.45 4.27 5.62 1
1-1/2 XXS 6.35 5.18 10.82 4.88 12.20 4.27 15.56 4.88 11.43 4.57 12.81 4.27 16.17 5.49 9.54 5.18 10.15 1-1/2
2 XXS 6.35 6.10 15.30 5.49 18.06 4.57 23.03 5.49 16.44 5.18 19.21 4.57 24.18 6.40 13.44 5.79 14.58 2
2-1/2 160 6.35 6.40 17.02 5.79 19.69 5.18 24.15 5.79 19.31 5.49 22.33 4.88 26.44 7.01 14.89 6.40 17.19 2-1/2
3 160 6.35 7.32 23.75 6.71 27.11 6.10 33.12 6.71 27.24 6.40 30.61 5.79 36.62 7.62 21.28 7.01 24.77 3
4 120 6.35 8.23 31.53 7.92 35.07 7.01 45.08 7.62 38.18 7.32 41.72 6.71 50.84 8.84 28.21 7.92 34.86 4
6 80 6.35 10.06 47.20 9.45 54.56 8.53 61.30 8.53 63.99 8.23 71.36 7.92 78.84 10.67 42.55 8.84 59.35 6
8 1/2"W 6.35 11.58 71.12 10.97 79.19 10.36 88.53 10.06 100.57 9.75 108.63 9.14 117.98 12.19 64.58 10.36 94.02 8
10 1/2"W 6.35 13.11 89.41 12.50 98.95 11.58 111.74 10.97 137.54 10.67 147.08 10.06 159.88 13.72 81.54 11.28 129.67 10
12 1/2"W 6.35 14.33 108.54 13.72 117.29 12.50 132.01 11.58 178.49 11.28 187.30 10.67 201.51 14.94 97.34 11.89 167.29 12
14 1/2"W 6.35 14.94 119.36 14.33 128.70 13.41 145.07 11.89 204.97 11.58 214.32 11.28 230.69 15.85 107.28 12.19 192.89 14
16 1/2"W 6.35 15.85 136.81 15.24 147.15 14.63 166.20 12.50 250.77 12.19 261.10 11.89 280.14 16.76 123.20 12.80† 237.14 16
18 1/2"W 6.35 17.07 154.30 16.15 165.90 15.24 187.18 13.11 300.72 12.80 312.33 12.19 333.31 17.98 139.12 13.41† 285.54 18
20 1/2"W 6.35 17.98 173.04 17.07 185.39 16.15 208.90 13.72 355.86 13.41 368.21 12.80 391.72 18.90 156.23 13.72† 339.05 20
24 1/2"W 6.35 19.51 206.52 18.29 221.10 17.68 248.63 14.33 474.54 14.02 489.12 13.72 517.09 20.73† 186.73 14.63† 454.75 24
* Spans limited by stress (all others limited by deflection).
† Pipe walls require reinforcing at point of support bearing in accordance with section
13.26.
13.26.3.2 GENERAL APPLICATION:
13.26.3.2.1 Spans shall be considered basic and represent the value "L". The actual working
spans shall be a function of "L" as indicated on the "typical piping diagrams" shown
in section 13.30.5.
13.30.3.2.2 Unit line weights shall be used in conjunction with the "weight tables" in appendix A
for the purpose of determining support loadings.
13.26.3.3 GENERAL NOTES:
Hydrostatic Testing - Spans are adequate without the addition of auxiliary supports
for lines on shoes. For bare pipe lines see section 13.26.
Pulsating Lines - Spans shall not be used. (Refer to Section 13.22 )
13.26.3.4 BASIC CONDITIONS:
Material - Spans shall be used for all pipe material of equivalent or higher tensile
trength than carbon steel - ASTM A-53 - ASTM A-106 - API-5L GR. "A".
Insulation Weight - In accordance with the "weight tables" in Excel spread

Sheet Pipedata.xls.
Pressure - In accordance with Kellogg design practice.
Temperature (oF) - As indicated. (Maximum - 750oF (399OC))
Corrosion Allowance - As indicated. Spans shall be used for lines of

equivalent or smaller corrosion allowance than those specified in the table.
Deflection - Based on (16mm max.)

TABLE OF BASIC SPANS & UNIT LINE WEIGHTS (OUTSIDE BATTERY LIMIT)
PIPE – VAPOUR PIPE – LIQUID BARE PIPE BARE PIPE

INSULATION INSULATION EMPTY WATER - FILLED
PIPE SCH. SPAN Deflect. WEIGHT SPAN Deflect. WEIGHT SPAN Deflect. WEIGHT SPAN Deflect. WEIGHT
SIZE Metres mm Kg/m Metres mm Kg/m Metres mm Kg/m Metres mm Kg/m
IN
2.54mm CORR. ALLOW
2 40 6.10 38 7.29 5.79 38 9.45 8.23 38 5.43 6.71 38
2-1/2 40 7.32 38 10.74 7.01 38 13.82 9.45 38 8.61 7.92 38
3 40 7.92 38 13.73 7.92 38 18.49 9.75 38 11.26 8.23 38
4 40 9.14 38 18.70 8.84 38 27.57 10.97 38 16.05 9.45 38
6 40 12.50 38 32.87 10.67 38 51.21 12.80 38 28.23 11.28 38
8 40 14.94 38 49.03 11.89 81.17 15.24 38 42.48 12.80
10 40 16.76 38 68.10 13.11 34.9 118.85 17.37 38 60.23 14.02 34.9
12 3/8"W 17.68 38 85.00 14.02 148.84 18.59 38 73.80 14.94
14 3/8"W 18.59 38 93.92 14.63 31.7 182.75 19.51† 38 81.84 15.24† 31.7
16 3/8"W 19.81 38 107.43 15.24 224.97 21.03† 38 93.74 15.54†
18 3/8"W 21.03 38 120.82 15.54 28.6 271.39 22.25† 38 105.64 15.85† 28.6
20 3/8"W 22.25 38 134.21 15.85 321.69 23.47† 38 117.54 16.15†
24 3/8"W 24.38 38 160.99 16.15 25 434.47 25.60† 38 141.35 16.76† 25.4
2.54mm CORR. ALLOW.

1-1/2 80 6.40 38 6.68 6.10 38 7.83 7.01 38 5.40 6.40 38
2 80 7.32 38 9.33 6.71 38 11.23 7.92 38 7.47 7.01 38
2-1/2 80 8.23 38 13.53 7.62 38 16.25 8.84 38 11.40 7.92 38
3 80 9.14 38 17.72 8.23 38 21.98 9.45 38 15.25 8.84 38
4 80 10.36 38 25.61 9.45 38 33.02 10.97 38 22.29 9.75 38
6 80 12.80 38 47.15 11.58 38 63.95 13.11 38 42.51 11.89 38
8 1/2"W 14.63 38 71.11 13.11 38 100.57 15.24 38 64.56 13.41 38
10 1/2"W 16.46 38 89.32 14.33 38 137.38 17.07 38 81.45 14.63 38
12 1/2"W 17.98 38 138.27 15.54 38 178.30 18.59 38 97.31 15.85 38
14 1/2"W 18.90 38 119.21 16.15 38 204.62 19.51† 38 107.13 16.15† 38
16 1/2"W 20.12 38 137.04 16.76 38 250.86 20.73† 38 123.50 17.37† 38
18 1/2"W 21.34 38 153.55 17.68 38 299.66 22.25† 38 138.38 17.98† 38
20 1/2"W 22.56 38 172.90 17.98 34.9 356.21 23.47† 38 156.23 18.29† 34.9
24 1/2"W 24.99 38 205.63 18.59 31.7 475.09 25.60† 38 185.99 18.90† 31.7
6.35mm CORR. ALLOW.

1-1/2 XXS 6.40 38 10.82 6.10 38 11.43 7.01 38 9.54 6.71 38
2 XXS 7.62 38 15.30 7.01 38 16.44 7.92 38 13.44 7.32 38
2-1/2 160 8.23 38 17.02 7.32 38 19.31 8.84 38 14.89 7.62 38
3 160 9.14 38 23.75 8.23 38 27.24 9.75 38 21.28 8.53 38
4 120 10.36 38 31.53 9.45 38 38.18 10.97 38 28.21 9.75 38
6 80 12.80 38 47.17 10.67 38 63.97 13.41 38 42.52 11.28 38
8 1/2"W 14.63 38 71.12 12.80 100.58 15.24 38 64.58 12.80 38
10 1/2"W 16.46 38 89.26 13.41 34.9 137.32 17.07 38 81.39 14.02 38
12 1/2"W 17.98 38 108.36 14.02 178.44 18.59 38 97.31 14.63
14 1/2"W 18.59 38 119.36 14.33 204.91 19.51† 38 107.28 14.94† 34.9
16 1/2"W 19.81 38 136.74 14.63 28.6 250.56 21.03† 38 123.20 15.24† 31.7
18 1/2"W 21.03 38 154.30 14.94 300.56 22.25† 38 139.12 15.54† 28.6
20 1/2"W 22.25 38 171.56 15.24 351.30 23.47† 38 154.89 15.85† 25.4
24 1/2"W 24.38 38 206.37 15.54 22.2 474.05 26.82† 38 186.73 16.15† 22.2
ALL SPANS REPRESENT THE VALUE "L*"
† Pipe walls require reinforcing at point of support bearing in accordance with section
13.26
13.26.3.5 GENERAL APPLICATION:
13.26.3.5.1 Spans shall be considered basic and represent the value "L*", identified with an
asterisk. The actual working spans shall be a function of "L*" as indicated on the
"Typical Piping Diagrams" shown in section 13.30.5.
13.26.3.5.2 Where drainage of lines is required, the slope between adjacent supports shall be
equal to the deflection indicated when the actual span equals the corresponding
basic span. For other spans:
Slope = Deflection x (Actual Span / Basic Span)4
13.26.3.5.3 Unit line weights shall be used in conjunction with the "weight tables" in appendix A
for the purpose of determining support loadings.
Hydrostatic Testing - See section 13.26
Pulsating Lines - Spans shall not be used. (Refer to section 13.22)
13.26.3.6 BASIC CONDITIONS:
Material - Spans shall be used for all pipe material of equivalent or higher tensile
strength than carbon steel - ASTM A-53 - ASTM A-106 - API-5L GR. "A".
Insulation Weight - In accordance with the "weight tables" in Excel spread

Sheet Pipedata.xls.
Pressure - In accordance with Kellogg design practice.
Temperature - Up to 400oF (204oC).
Corrosion Allowance - As indicated. Spans shall be used for lines of equivalent or

smaller corrosion allowance than those specified in the table.
Deflection - As indicated (38mm max.) Where less than the maximum deflection is
indicated, the span is limited by stress. All others are limited by deflection.
GENERAL
This subject provides a method to evaluate the acceptability of a concentrated load imposed on a
pipe between two support locations using the attached charts. The first chart (Curve 1) uses the
most conservative approach. Most of the chart is limited by point load limits. The second chart
(Curve 2) is based on controlling longitudinal stresses only(i.e. moment loads)
Typical imposed loads might be the weight of a branch line or the weight of a branch line or the
weight of a valve or other heavy piping components.
EXAMPLE
The following information is known :
L = The basic allowable span in metres, from Section 13.30.3
W = The weight of the supporting line, including the contents and insulation in Kg per
metre, from Section 13.30.3
S = The actual span between the supports in metres.
P = The imposed load in kg.
D = The distance from the point of the imposed load to the nearest support in metres
Since L and W are fixed, that leaves only S, P and D that could possibly be varied and even
they are often more or less fixed.
Usually, the best approach is to take the actual figures for L ,W, D and S and using the charts
solve for the maximum load that P could be and compare this figure with the actual P.
If the actual imposed load P is greater than the maximum allowable P, then either S, P or D
must be reduced. Sometimes a reduction to two or more of these figures will result in a
satisfactory answer.
Assume the following conditions:
Chart for curve 1 applies.
L = 12.0 m
W = 180 kg/m
S = 6.0 m
P = 600 kg (actual load)
D = 1.2 m
Enter the chart at the left where D/S = 0.2. Move horizontally to the right until the curve where
S/L = 0.5 is reached, then move vertically downward to find P/WS = 2.5.
Maximum P = 0.62 WS
=0.62 x 180 x 6.0
= 669.6 kg
Since the maximum P is greater than the actual P, the system is workable and no changes are
required.
If it is known that point loads will not be a problem (check section 13.30.3) then using chart for
Curve 2.
Maximum P = 2.15 WS
=2.15 x 180 x 6.0
= 2322 kg
IMPOSED LOADS ON HORIZONTAL LINES
EMBED Excel.Sheet.8
Note: - Curve based on minimum P/WS for either point load or moment load limit.
S
= fraction of L
D
(frac. P/WS
P (as fraction of WS)
of S)
IMPOSED LOADS ON HORIZONTAL LINES
EMBED Excel.Sheet.8
S
= fraction of L
D
(frac.
P (as fraction of WS)
of S)
Note: - Curve based on minimum P/WS for moment load limit only.
TYPICAL PIPING DIAGRAMS - SUPPORT LOCATIONS
General Notes
1. The actual piping system can usually be broken down into typical diagrams as shown
oh the following pages. When a complete diagram does not apply, applicable sections
from different diagrams can be used to make up the system.
2. For the determination of the basic span "L" for pipe within battery limit or "L" for pipe outside
battery limit, see Section 13.26.3.
3. The basic span shall be adjusted accordingly by the sustained length of pipe on either side of
the support. See Table I.
4. For imposed loads see Section 13.26.4.
5. For overhang variations see Section 13.26.10.
6. Point load limits at supports have not been considered. These should be checked separately.
(See Section 13.26.3).
7. Thermal flexibility has not been considered, only sustained loads due to weight.
TABLE I
SUSTAINED LENGTH SPAN LENGTH
0.22L (min.). L or L*
Less than 0.22L 0.90L or 0.90L*
See SectionTYPICAL
See Sections 13.30.10 forPIPING
13.30.6 and DIAGRAMS – SUPPORT
See Sections 13.30.6 and 13.30.7
13.30.7
Overhang LOCATIONS
forVariations
Guide Spacing. for Guide Spacing.
TYPICAL PIPING DIAGRAMS – SUPPORT LOCATIONS

See Section 13.26.10 for

Overhang Variations.
See Section 13.26.6 and

13.26.7 for Guide Spacing.
DIAGRAM NO. 1
See Section 13.26.6 and

DIAGRAM NO. 2
TYPICAL
See Section 13.30.6PIPING
for DIAGRAMS – SUPPORT
LOCATIONS
Length/Radius of Gyration. Length/Radius of Gyration.
See section 13.26.6 for

Length/Radius of Gyration
DIAGRAM NO. 3

Length/Radius of Gyration.
DIAGRAM NO. 4
TYPICAL
See Sections 13.30.6 PIPING
and 13.30.7 DIAGRAMS – SUPPORT
LOCATIONS
for Guide Spacing. Overhang Variations.
See Sections 13.26.6 and

DIAGRAM NO. 5

DIAGRAM NO. 6
TYPICAL PIPING DIAGRAMS – SUPPORT SeeSee
See
Section
Section
Sections
13.30.10
13.30.6
13.30.6
forfor
Overhang
and 13.30.7
LOCATIONS Variations.
Length/Radius
for Guide Spacing.
of Gyration.

Length/Radius of Gyration.
DIAGRAM NO. 7 See Section 13.26.10 for


for Guide Spacing.
DIAGRAM NO. 8
SeeSee
Section
Sections
13.30.6 for TYPICAL
13.30.6 and PIPING DIAGRAMSTYPICAL
–See
SUPPORT
See PIPING
Section
Section DIAGRAMS
13.30.10
13.30.10
See Section
for forSee – SUPPORT
13.30.6
Sections
for 13.30.6 and
Length/Radius
13.30.7 for Guide LOCATIONS
of Gyration.
Spacing. LOCATIONS
Overhang
OverhangVariations.
Variations.
Length/Radius 13.30.7
of Gyration.
for Guide Spacing.

for Guide Spacing.
See Sections 13.26.6

and 13.26.7 for Guide
Spacing.
DIAGRAM NO. 9
See Section
13.26.6 for
Length/Radius
of Gyration.
See Sections 13.26.6

and 13.26.7 for
DIAGRAM NO. 10 Guide Spacing
TYPICAL
See Section 13.30.6 for PIPING DIAGRAMS – SUPPORT
See Section
See Section
13.30.10
13.30.6
for for
LOCATIONS
Length/Radius of Gyration. Overhang
Length/Radius
Variations.of Gyration.


DIAGRAM NO. 11


DIAGRAM NO. 12
TYPICAL PIPING DIAGRAMSSee
– SUPPORT
Section 13.30.10 for
LOCATIONS Overhang Variations.
DIAGRAM NO. 13

Overhang variations.

DIAGRAM NO. 14
TYPICAL PIPING DIAGRAMS – SUPPORT
See Section
See Section
13.30.10
13.30.10
for for
LOCATIONS Overhang
Overhang
Variations.
Variations.
TYPICAL PIPING DIAGRAMS – SUPPORT

LOCATIONS
See Section 13.26.10 for Overhang

Variations.


DIAGRAM NO. 15
DIAGRAM NO. 17
A 150 LB Flange valve

has been assumed.

Imposed loads.
It is assumed that a welding
Tee will be used.
DIAGRAM NO. 16
VERTICAL GUIDE SPACINGS FOR COMPRESSION MEMBERS (*) in m
LINE SIZE SCH 10 SCH 40 SCH 80 SCH 160

1" 2.16 2.13 2.07 1.95
1-1/2" 3.20 3.14 3.05 2.95
2" 4.05 3.99 3.87 3.69
2-1/2" 4.94 4.79 4.69 4.54
3" 6.07 5.91 5.76 5.55
4" 7.86 7.65 7.50 7.19
6" 7.00 6.83 6.69 6.40
8" 9.14 8.96 8.77 8.38
10" 11.40 11.19 10.96 10.44
12" 13.53 13.31 13.01 12.40
14" 14.81 14.62 14.30 13.66
16" 16.97 16.70 16.36 15.61
18" 19.12 18.79 18.41 17.57
20" 21.28 20.91 20.47 19.54
24" 25.60 25.15 24.60 23.47
Guide spacings are based on the following ratios of length over radius of gyration (L/R) :
L/R ≤ 200 for lines ≤ 4” diameter and

L/R ≤120 for lines ≥ 6” diameter
(*) Compression member is defined for use in this table as a vertical line supported at the lowest
elevation.
VERTICAL GUIDE SPACING TABLE
MAX SPACING OF GUIDES (h)

TABLE 1
Pipe Size Insul.Thick Wind Pres. Wind Pres. Wind Pres. Wind Pres. Wind Pres.
(mm) 30 P.S.F. 35 P.S.F. 40 P.S.F. 45 P.S.F. 50 P.S.F.
Spacing in Spacing in Spacing in Spacing in Spacing in
(m) (m) (m) (m) (m)
1" 25.4 1.00 0.96 0.93 0.72 0.71
1-1/2" 25.4 1.33 1.28 1.24 0.97 0.94
2" 25.4 1.59 1.53 1.48 1.01 0.98
3" 25.4 1.93 1.85 1.79 1.39 1.36
4" 25.4 2.39 2.30 2.22 1.73 1.68
6" 50.8 3.60 3.46 3.35 2.60 2.54
8" 50.8 4.53 4.36 4.21 3.28 3.19
10" 50.8 5.51 5.30 5.13 3.99 3.88
12" 50.8 6.44 6.19 5.99 4.66 4.53
14" 50.8 7.01 6.75 6.53 5.07 4.94
16" 76.2 8.10 7.80 7.54 5.86 5.71
18" 76.2 8.99 8.65 8.36 6.50 6.33
20" 76.2 9.96 9.58 9.27 7.20 7.02
24" 76.2 11.82 11.37 11.00 8.55 8.33
30" 76.2 14.63 14.07 13.61 10.58 10.30
36" 76.2 17.33 15.54 13.72 12.19 10.97
42" 76.2 18.29 15.54 13.72 12.19 10.97
The Table 1 notes:
1. The pipe is assumed to be remote from any column or other vertical structure.
2. The pipe is assumed to have partial fixing at the ends i.e. one end is assumed fixed the
other simply supported.
3. The above maximum lengths are principally dictated by the need to limit resonant vibration
due to vortex shedding.
4. Insulation density is assumed to be 140kg/m3.
5. Young's modulus has been assumed to be 190000N/mm 2.
6. Line material is equivalent to ASTM A106B or ASTM A358 grd 304.
7. The table is based on temperatures limits of 149 oC (300oF) max. for A358 material or 368
o
C (400oF) max. for A106B material.
8. Pipe minimum thickness has been assumed to be schedule 10. Heavy pipes (greater than
sch 80) may require separate consideration due to the effect on resonant frequency.
VERTICAL GUIDE SPACING TABLE
MAX SPACING OF GUIDES (h)

TABLE 2
Pipe Size Insul.Thick Wind Pres. Wind Pres. Wind Pres. Wind Pres. Wind Pres.
(mm) 30 P.S.F. 35 P.S.F. 40 P.S.F. 45 P.S.F. 50 P.S.F.
Spacing in Spacing in Spacing in Spacing in Spacing in
(m) (m) (m) (m) (m)
1" 25.4 3.01 2.90 2.81 2.72 2.62
1-1/2" 25.4 3.71 3.57 3.45 3.35 3.26
2" 25.4 4.18 4.02 3.89 3.78 3.68
3" 25.4 5.15 4.96 4.80 4.66 4.54
4" 25.4 5.88 5.66 5.47 5.31 5.18
6" 50.8 6.93 6.67 6.45 6.26 6.10
8" 50.8 8.00 7.69 7.44 7.22 6.71
10" 50.8 9.00 8.66 8.38 8.14 7.62
12" 50.8 9.87 9.49 9.18 8.92 8.23
14" 50.8 10.37 9.98 9.65 9.37 8.53
16" 76.2 10.84 10.43 10.09 9.79 9.14
18" 76.2 11.51 11.08 10.71 10.40 9.75
20" 76.2 12.25 11.79 11.40 11.07 10.36
24" 76.2 13.54 13.03 12.60 12.19 10.97
30" 76.2 15.29 14.72 13.72 12.19 10.97
36" 76.2 17.33 15.54 13.72 12.19 10.97
42" 76.2 18.29 15.54 13.72 12.19 10.97
The Table 2 notes:
1. The pipe is assumed to be close proximity to a column of at least 1000mm diameter.

Vortex shedding frequencies have been based on this column size except in the case of
overall outside diameters greater than 1000mm, where the actual O.D. has been used.
2. The pipe is assumed to have partial fixing at the ends i.e. one end is assumed fixed the
other simply supported.
3. The above maximum lengths are principally dictated by the need to limit resonant vibration
due to vortex shedding.
4. Insulation density is assumed to be 140kg/m3.
5. Young's modulus has been assumed to be 190000N/mm 2.
6. Line material is equivalent to ASTM A106B or ASTM A358 grd 304.
7. The table is based on temperatures limits of 149 oC (300oF) max. for A358 material or 368
o
C (400oF) max. for A106B material.
8. Pipe minimum thickness has been assumed to be schedule 10. Heavy pipes (greater than
sch 80) may require separate consideration due to the effect on resonant frequency.
General Notes
1. For lines with insulation thicknesses larger than those shown, the reduced guide spacing (h1)
may be found by the following formula:
h1 = h x D1/D2 approximately
Where: D1 = O.D. of pipe in mm + twice the given insulation thickness in mm from

the above table.
D2 = O.D. of pipe in mm + twice the actual insulation thickness in mm, as

shown in the nomenclature.
2. The guide spacings shown are only for lines that are supported above the guides, as shown
in figures 1 through 4.
3. A more accurate determination of permitted guide spacing maybe obtained from the following
formula:
Guide spacing should be the minimum of the following:
L= 1000
L=
Where:
L = Allowable distance between guides (in m).

S = Allowable Stress. This has been divided by 2 in above equation to
allow for
Axial pressure stresses. (in N/mm2).
Z = Section modulus for pipe. (in mm3).
K = Allowable stress increase for wind (1.33 in ASME B31.3).
O.D. = Pipe outside diameter including insulation.(in mm)
Pw = Effective wind pressure = qz.Gh.Cf if using ASCE 7 (in N/mm2).
(See appropriate national standard for details).
E = Young's modulus at maximum operating temperature.(in N/m 2).
I = Second moment of area or moment of inertia for pipe section(in m 4).
g = Acceleration due to gravity (in m/s2).
V = Wind Velocity. (in m/s)
w = Pipe weight per metre (in N/m).
3. In setting the guide elevations, be sure to check for interferences between the guide
clips attached to the vessels and items such as nozzle reinforcing pads, platform clips and known
seams.
MIN
MIN
SUPPORT
h/2±
SUPPORT 75m
m
h/2
±75
mm
HORIZONTAL GUIDE SPACING FOR WIND VIBRATION
GUIDE
h
Horizontal Pipe on Support Structuresh
6" diameter or less - every other yard bent or equivalent 8" to 24" diameter - every
GUIDE h/2 third yard bent
or equivalent 26" diameter and over - every
h/2 fourth yard bent or equivalent MIN
MIN
This spacing allows for the effect of friction on the unguided supports which restricts vibrating
motion. Adjust for pipes which are shielded from the wind.
Figure 1 Figure 2
Horizontal Pipe Supported by Hangers
Usually guide at every other hanger except where the vertical guide spacing indicates a greater
spacing or where the pipe is shielded from the wind. A hanger restrains pipe motion less than
when the pipe is resting on a support structure.
SUPPORT SUPPORT
h/2 ±
h/2± 3 3
GUIDE
GUIDE
h
h
GUIDE
GUIDE
h/2 h/2
MIN MIN
Figure 3 Figure 4
13.26.8.0 DESIGN OF PIPE ATTACHMENTS
13.26.8.1. All attachments to the pipe shell, such as trunnions, clips, lugs, etc., shall be
designed so that the pipe shell bending and pressure stresses as outlined in the
following paragraphs do not exceed the total allowable.
13.26.8.2. The BENDING STRESS, SB, in a cylindrical shell is a function of pipe size, pipe thickness,
and the induced load per linear inch along the edge of the attachment. It may be evaluated
by the following formula
SB = 1.17 f (R)0.5
t1.5
WHERE:
SB = Bending stress in pipe shell, N/mm2.

f = load induced by the attachment, N per linear mm along the
edge of the attachment.
R = outside radius of pipe shell, mm.
t = corroded wall thickness of the pipe shell plus the thickness of
the reinforcement pad (when a pad is required), mm.
13.26.8.3. The PRESSURE STRESS, Sp, in a cylindrical shell is a function of pipe size, pipe
thickness, internal pressure, and the type of loading being considered. For loads
producing maximum stress in the shell in the longitudinal direction (see Table A,
Page 7). The Longitudinal Pressure Stress may be evaluated by the following
formula:
SPL = PR
2t
WHERE:
SPL = Longitudinal Pressure Stress. (N/mm2)

P = Internal Pressure at design condition under consideration, (N/mm 2)
R = Outside radius of the pipe shell. (mm)
t = Corroded wall thickness of the pipe shell plus the thickness of the
reinforcement pad (when a pad is required) less mill tolerances , (mm)
For loads producing maximum stress in the shell in the circumferential direction
(see Table A, Page 7). The Circumferential Pressure Stress may be evaluated by
the following formula:
SPC = PR
t
WHERE:
SPC = Circumferential Pressure Stress. (N/mm2)

P = Internal Pressure at design condition under consideration. (N/mm 2)
R = Outside radius of pipe shell. (mm)
t = Corroded wall thickness of the pipe shell plus the thickness of the
reinforcement pad (when a pad is required). (mm)
13.26.8.4. The TOTAL ALLOWABLE STRESS, S, is the sum of the ALLOWABLE BENDING
STRESS and PRESSURE STRESS. For the various possible combinations of
normal and short time loading conditions, the applicable total allowable stress is
given in TABLE B, Page 8.
13.26.8.5. Generally it is desirable to determine the maximum allowable load on the shell, for a
given pipe diameter, pipe thickness, and total stress, and design the attachment so
that this load will not be exceeded. The maximum allowable load on the shell may
be determined as follows:
fm =
WHERE:
fm = Maximum allowable load, N/ linear mm
SB = Total allowable BENDING STRESS, N/mm2
(S – Spc).
13.26.8.6. The actual load induced by the clip, lug, trunnion, and etc. N per linear mm, shall be
calculated as described in paragraphs 7 through 12 and according to the formulas
of TABLE A (see Page 7).
13.26.8.7. For circular attachments, such as pipe trunnions which produce bending in the pipe
shell, formulas (1), (2), and (3), given in FIGURES VI, VII, and VIII, Page 11, are
applicable and shall be used to determine the induced load per linear mm. Also, the
local stress generated from given applied loads are given in FIGURES IX, X, and XI
on Page 12.
13.30.8.8. For Lug attachments and structural attachments that produce bending in
the pipe shell, formulas given in FIGURES III and IV, Page 4, are applicable and
shall be used the induced load per linear mm.
13.26.8.9. The load as applied to the shell and reinforcement pad is linear. The size of the
weld does not affect the magnitude of the load. For a clip attachment as shown in
FIGURE I, a single line load on the shell is all that should be considered. Where
two weld attachments about 100mm or more apart as shown in FIGURE II are
used, then two load lines should be considered.
1.5√(RT)
one load line two load lines
(100mm min)
FIGURE I FIGURE II
13.26.8.10. The general equation for calculating the linear load on the shell is:
f = MC
I
Where:
M = moment on the attachment, (N-mm)
C = Distance from the centre of gravity of the attachment to the extreme fibre.
(N)
I = linear moment of inertia (mm3)
13.26.8.11. Two basic sections, Figures III and IV have been selected from which the linear
moment of inertia and section modulus of any compound shape may be
determined.
b
b
L
3
I=b /3 X X I=bL2 X
X
FIGURE III FIGURE IV
13.26.8.12. An example illustrating the application of Figures III and IV to determine the linear
moment of inertia and section modulus of a compound shape is as follows:
GIVEN: 175mm
T
C2
x x L=250mm
C1 T
X1 X1
FIGURE V
SOLUTION:
Locate the center of gravity of the shape. This is the sum of the moments of each line about the
x1-x1 axis divided by the total length of each line.
a. c1 = (bL + L2/2)/(b + L)
= (175 x 250 + 2502/2)/(175 + 250)
= 176.47mm
b. c2 = 250-176.47
= 73.53mm
c. Applying the formulas for FIGURES III and IV to determine the linear
moment of inertia about the axis x-x:
I = 73.533/3 + 176.473/3 + 175(73.53)2

= 2910539 mm3.
d. The linear section modulus is then equal to:
Z = I/c1 = 2910539 mm3/176.47mm

= 16493 mm2.
The load per mm will be the moment about the axis x-x divided by the linear section
modulus.
f= m
z
13.26.8.13. For moments producing bending in the shell in the circumferential direction, and for
direct axial force, a factor of 1.5 is applied to the load. This application is shown in
TABLE A, page 7.
13.30.8.14. For loads caused by thermal expansion, an exception is made in that the 1.5
factor is not applied when determining stresses due to circumferential bending
moments. A summary of the factors to be applied to "f" for different load
combinations is given in TABLE A, see page 7.
13.30.8.15. The stresses due to the attachment load on the shell are considered as
LOCAL or DISCONTINUOUS STRESSES. In as much as such stresses. decrease
to a negligible value within a short distance from their origin. For designs NOT
involving thermal effects, the allowable stress may be increased by 100% at such
localised places on the shell.
13.30.8.16. MATERIAL OF ATTACHMENTS: Attachments made of the same material as
the pipe, are usually suitable but often are more adequate than necessary. When
the attachment material is carbon steel, the cost is not too significant. However,
when alloy materials are used as structural attachments, the cost may be increased
significantly.
Only in cases where the carbon steel attachment proves to be uneconomical or

structurally unsound will alloy be permitted as a substitute. Such cases must be
brought to the attention of the Piping Mechanical Section for evaluation and
approval.
In general, materials used for attachment should be of the same chemical analysis
as the pipe, because it eliminates the need for an analysis for differential thermal
expansion.
TABLE C (see Page 9) indicates the temperature limits of the various piping materials and the
attachment material suitable for the various temperature conditions.
TABLE D (see Page 10) gives the equivalent ASTM specifications to the material types in
TABLE C.
TABLE A
LOADS FOR CALCULATING LOCALISED BENDING STRESSES
TYPE OF LOADING LOAD “F” FOR CALCULATING STRESS
LONG CIRCU DIRE

LOAD DUE TO
ITUDI MFER CT
SUSTAINED LOAD DUE TO
NAL ENTIA AXIA
EFFECTS THERMAL
BENDI L L
(WEIGHT, WIND, ETC) EXPANSION
NG BENDI FOR
(1)
MOM NG CE
ENT MOME
NT
X F1 = FL F1 = FL
X X F1 = FL + 1.5 FA F1 = FL + 1.5 FA
X F1 = 1.5 FA F1 = 1.5 FA
X F2 = 1.5 FC F2 = FC
X X F2 = 1.5(FC + FA ) F2 = FC + 1.5FA
X X X F2 = FR1 + 1.5FA F2 = FR2 + 1.5 FA (2)
FL = load due to longitudinal bending, (N per linear mm)

FC = load due to circumferential bending, (N per linear mm)
FA = load due to direct force, (N per linear mm).
FRx = load due to the resultant moments in the longitudinal and circumferential directions. (N
per linear mm).
FR1 = FR2 =
F1 = load producing maximum stress in the shell in the longitudinal direction, (N/mm).
F2 = load producing maximum stress in the shell in the circumferential direction, (N/ mm).
NOTES: 1. Thermal loads may either plus or minus, but shall be added to other loads
numerically, disregarding sign, to give maximum absolute value.
2. The resultant load shall not be used if F L ≥ 3 FC or FC ≥ 2FL .
In this case, the stresses due to longitudinal bending and circumferential bending shall be
considered separately, with the maximum value controlling.
TABLE B
TOTAL ALLOWABLE LOCAL STRESSES
NORMAL SHORT TIME

T P S T T P S T W
E R U H E R U H I
M E S E M E S E N
P S T R P S T R D
DESIGN CONDITIONS E S A M E S A M TOTAL
R U I A R U I A ALLOWABLE
A R N L A R N L STRESS
T E E T E E “S” (1)
U D U D
R ( R
E 3 L E L
) O O
( A A
2 D D
)
NORMAL OPERATING X X X 2.0 Sh
X X X X
X X X
SHORT TIME OPERATING 2.4Sh
X X X
X X X
X X X
NORMAL THERMAL ONLY X X 1.25SC + 0.25Sh
X X X X X
X X X X
SHORT TIME OPERATING 1.5(Sh + Sc)
X X X X
WITH THERMAL
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
TEST X X X 2.4SC
Sh = basic allowable stress at design temperature (N/mm 2).

Sc = basic allowable stress at atmospheric temperature (N/mm 2)
NOTES: 1. The total allowable stress SHALL NOT exceed 206.8 N/mm 2
(Lower limits maybe applicable to stainless steels and material operating at
elevated temperatures).
2. Not the load, but considered for the establishment of Sh.
3. Internal Pressure (internal load)
TABLE C
PIPE ATTACHMENT MATERIALS
PIPE MATERIAL TEMPERATURE ATTACHMENT NOTES

(Nominal) LIMITS (oC) MATERIAL
CARBON STEEL -30 oC to 590 oC CARBON STEEL (1), (4), (5)
CARBON-MOLY -30 oC to 590 oC CARBON STEEL (1), (4), (5)

½ Cr - ½ Mo
1Cr - ½ Mo
1¼ Cr - ½ Mo -30 oC to 590 oC CARBON STEEL (1) , (3), (4), (5)
2¼ Cr - 1Mo -30 oC to 650 oC SAME AS PIPE (1), (3), (5)

5 Cr- ½ Mo
18Cr - 8Ni -30 oC to 230 oC CARBON STEEL (1), (4), (5)
230 oC to 815 oC SAME AS PIPE (1), (2), (4), (5)
NOTES:
(1) Applicable to attachments which are welded to the pipe.
(2) Carbon steel may be used above 230oC if approved by Lead piping Stress and Materials
Engineers.
(3) In cases where carbon steel cannot be used economically, alloy steel may be substituted,
if approved by Lead piping Stress and Materials Engineers.
(4) Circular attachments (trunnions) shall be used for temperatures above 400 oC.
(5) The temperature limits shown above are not necessarily the allowable limits for the
attachment material.
TABLE D
ALLOY MATERIAL
Nominal analysis and ASTM Specification, (seamless)

NOMINAL ANALYSIS
ASTM GRADE OR
SPECIFICATION SYMBOL
CARBON-MOLY A335 P1
1/2%Cr 1/2% MO A335 P2
l% Cr - 1/2% MO A335 P12
1-1/4% Cr -1/2% MO A335 P11
2%-. Cr - ½% MO A335 P3b
2-1/4% Cr – 1% MO A335 P22
3% Cr – 1% MO A335 P21
5% Cr - 1/2% MO A335 P5
7% Cr - 1/2% MO A335 P7
9% Cr - 1% MO A335 P9
18% Cr - 8% Ni A312 TP304
LOADING DUE TO LONGITUDINAL BENDING
fL = ML/πr2 N/mm (1)
ML = Longitudinal bending moment
M = FxL N-mm
L r r2 = 1.17 R0.5 ML = 0.3724 (R0.5 ML)
π SB t1.5 SB t1.5
F Mmax = SB r2 t1.5 N-mm
0.3724 R0.5
R L FIGURE VI
LOADING DUE TO CIRCUMFERENTIAL BENDING

fC = MC/πr2 N/mm (2)
MC = Circumferential bending moment
M = FxL N-mm
C
r r2 = 1.75 R0.5 MC = 0.557 (R0.5 MC)
π SB t1.5 SB t1.5
F Mmax = SB r2 t1.5 N-mm
0.557 R0.5
R L
FIGURE VII
LOADING DUE TO AXIAL FORCE

fA = Pa/2πr N/mm (3)
Pa = Direct axial force N
P r = 1.75 R0.5 Pa = 0.279 (R0.5 Pa)

2π SB t1.5 SB t1.5
r a
Pa = SB r t1.5 N-mm
0. 279 R0.5
R FIGURE VIII
R = Outside radius of pipe shell, mm.

r = Outside radius of trunnion, mm.
F = Force on trunnion inducing longitudinal or circumferential bending on pipe shell, N.
L = Moment arm of force F, mm.
t = Thickness of Pipe or pipe plus pad, mm.
M = Moment, N-mm.
SB = Bending stress in pipe shell. (N/mm2)
Pa = Direct axial force N.
CYLINDRICAL PIPE ATTACHMENTS
LOCAL STRESSES
CASE I: LOCAL STRESS DUE TO LONGITUDINAL BENDING

t + CA Full Fillet Weld f = ML/πr2 N/mm
(Typ)
Satt = 1.17 f (Rt)0.5 + PR N/mm2
ML t 2
2t
L
r Note: Details in this drawing
Weld Through are typical for Figures X & XI
+ 12mm min.
Fillet Weld
(Typ)
FIGURE IX
CASE II: LOCAL STRESS DUE TO CIRCUMFERENTIAL BENDING
MC
f = MC/πr2 N/mm
0.5
Satt = 1.75 f (Rt) + PR N/mm2
t2 t
R FIGURE X
CASE III: LOCAL STRESS DUE TO AXIAL FORCE
f = Pa/2πr N/mm
P Satt = 1.75 f (Rt)0.5 + PR N/mm2
a t2 2t
FIGURE XI
Pa = Axial force Applied, N. f = Unit Force applied, N/mm .

ML = Long. Moment Applied N-mm t = Corroded thk. of Pipe inc. reinforcing pad mm.
0.5
MC = Circ. Moment Applied N-mm L = Pad Width = (Rt) mm.
R = Outside radius of pipe, mm.. = 50mm minimum
r = Outside radius of trunnion, mm. Satt = Attachment Stress + Pressure Stress N/mm2
CA = Corrosion Allowence, mm.
WELD STRESS FORMULAS
P = Force in Newtons.
S = Normal stress in N/mm2.
Ss = Shear stress in N/mm2.
M = Bending moment in Nmm.
L2 = Linear distance in mm.
h = Size of weld Leg in mm.
(h1 and h2 are also used).
L = Length of weld in mm.
(L1 and L2 are also used)
IP = Polar moment of inertia
Per unit weld throat length-
mm3
Ixx = Moment of inertia about xx
Axis Per unit weld throat
length-
In mm3.
Iyy = Moment of inertia about yy
Axis Per unit weld throat
length-
In mm3.
L
L
P P
P P
h h
h
1
2
S= P S= P
hL
(h1+h2)L
L
M M
M L
M
h
T
h
S= S= 3TM
6M Lh(3T2 – 6Th +
4h2)
Lh2

L1+2h e1
Centroid
Axis
b
L1/2+h
F1
R1
C
1
2
A
P
R2
F2
L2/2+h
e2
Weld Centroid L2+2h

Lines. h
Weld Stresses for Eccentrically Loaded Angle
For pure axial loads
S= 1.414P (2h of each weld is

h(L1+L2) considered ineffective)
L1 and L2 should be at least equal to the following :-

L1 = 1.414Pe2 ; L2 = 1.414Pe1
Sxhxb Sxhxb
Additional stresses for eccentric loads:-
1) Calculate Polar Moment of Inertia (per unit weld Throat length)
C = (L2b)/(L1+L2)
IP = Iyy + Ixx
Iyy = , Ixx = L1C2+L2(b-C)2

2) Calculate R1 and R2
R1 = ƒ(C2+ (L1/2)2), R2 = ƒ[(b-C)2+(L2/2)2]
3) Calculate ƒ1 and ƒ2
Φ1 = arcsin(2C/L1), Φ2 =arcsin[2(b-C)/L2)
(“arcsin” is sometimes shown as sin-1 on some calculators)
4) Calculate ST1 and St2
ST1 = 1.414PAR1/(h.IP) , ST2 = 1.414PAR2/(h.IP)
5) Calculate Resultant Stress SR1 and SR2
SR1 = , SR2 =
SR1 and SR2 should be within the allowable Fillet weld shear stresses values for the
governing code or standard applicable to the project or job worked on, otherwise refer to
ASME B31.3 or ASME 8 Div. 1.
CHART NO. I
NOTES
1. The sum of dimensions C & D in Chart I must be equal to at least 0.9L
2. For determination of basic span L see Section 13.30.3.
3. All dimensions are in feet.
EXAMPLE
Enter the chart with either dimension "A" or "B". Preferably use the dimension that has the
point of support fixed and allow the other point of support to be varied.
Line size 8"

Schedule 40
Corrosion allowance 0.10"
Line is liquid filled
Line is insulated
Design temperature 300° F
Dim. "A" is fixed at 15’-0"
"L" from Section 13.30.3, is 33'-O"
Enter the chart at the point along the bottom line where dimension "A" equals 15’-0"; then move
up vertically to the point where curve "L" is intersected equal to 33'-O"; then move horizontally
to the right to find the maximum dimension of "B", which, in this example, equals 12’-6". This
means that the actual dimension of "B" must be 12’-6" or less.
CHART NO. II
NOTES
1. The sum of dimensions C & D in Chart II must be equal to at least 0.9L
2. For determination of basic span L see Section 13.30.3.
3. All dimensions are in feet
EXAMPLE
Enter the chart with either dimension "A" or "B". Preferably use the dimension that is fixed by
the points of support fixed and allow the other dimension to be varied.
Line size 12"

Schedule 3/8" wall
Line is-water filled
Line is uninsulated
Dim. "A" is fixed at 10’-0"
"L" from subject 3110 is 40'-O"
Enter the chart at the point along the bottom line where dimension "A" equals 10’-0"; then move
up vertically to the point where curve "L" is intersected equal to 40'-O"; then move horizontally
to the right to find the maximum dimension of "B", which, in this example, equals 22’-6". This
means that the actual dimension of "B" must be 22'-6" or less.
A C
B Points of Support
PLA D
N
CHART NO. III

NOTES
1. All dimensions are in feet
2. Overhang variations shall be applied to typical piping diagrams shown in Section 13.30.5.
3. For determination of the basic span "L" see Section 13.30.3.
EXAMPLE
Of the three (3) dimensions "A", "B" and "C" pick the two dimensions that can be changed or
varied the least. Then using the chart find the maximum length of the third dimension.
Line size 10"

Schedule 40
Line is liquid filled
Line is insulated
"L" from Section 13.30.3 is 35'-O"
Dim. "A" is fixed at 7'-O" or 0.2L Dim. "A" is fixed at 14’-0" or 0.4L
Enter the chart at the point along the bottom line where dimension "A" equals 0.2L; then move
up vertically to the point where curve "B" is intersected equal to 0.4L; then move horizontally to
the left to find the maximum dimension of "C", which, in this example, equals 0.5L or 17’-6” or
less.
1.00L
0.8L
0.6L
“C” “B”
0.4L
0.2L 0.4L 0.6L 0.8L 1.0L

“A”
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
NUMBER
13.27.1 Horizontal Trunnions
13.27.2
Base Support Trunnions
13.27.3
Trunnion Design For High Temperature Lines
HORIZONTAL TRUNNIONS
Trunnion Length
The length of a trunnion is measured from the centerline of the pipe to which the trunnion is
attached.
trunnion length = Ro + e + 150mm
Ro - outside radius of pipe, mm.
e - distance from outside Of pipe to center of support steel, round up to the next whole
inch.
Trunnion Diameter
The diameter of a trunnion determines its load carrying capacity. The load capacity of a trunnion
can be obtained from the charts or by the methods in Subject 3810. In addition, the
minimum nominal size trunnion for pipes up to 12" pipe size is one-half the nominal
pipe size. This is done for appearance reasons.
Trunnion Elevation
The centerline elevation of a trunnion is used to give its vertical position.
Trunnion centerline elevation = T.O.S. + ro + 25mm
ro - outside radius of trunnion or bearing plate, mm.

T.O.S - top of steel support structure elevation, mm. The additional 25mm is for a shim
which is used to adjust field tolerances.
DESIGN METHOD USING CHARTS
The equivalent moment, EM, must be less than or equal to the "MOMENT CAPACITY" given
in the table for HORIZONTAL TRUNNIONS.
CAF = corrosion allowance correction factor. (See formula)

EM = equivalent moment at pipe, KN-m.
L = moment arm from outside pipe surface to center of support steel, m.
TMF = temperature & material correction factor (See table).
Pc = load on trunnion in the circumferential direction of the pipe, KN.
PI = load on trunnion in the longitudinal direction of the pipe, KN.
Temperature & Material Correction Factor

The temperature and material corrector factor, TMF, is used to adjust the equivalent moment,
EM, for variations in pipe temperature and/or pipe material from the values used to determine
MOMENT CAPACITY in the HORIZONTAL TRUNNION table (AI06 Gr. B at 1000 F). The pipe
temperature used should be that corresponding to the loads on the trunnion. (Don't use flex
temperature for hydrostatic test loads.) Interpolation between temperatures is permitted.
TEMPERATURE & MATERIAL CORRECTION FACTOR

TMF
Pipe Temperature A106-B A335-P11 A312-TP304
O O
F C
100 37.8 1.00 1.00 1.00
200 93.3 1.00 1.07 1.00
300 148.9 1.00 1.11 1.00
400 204.4 1.00 1.14 1.07
500 260.0 1.06 1.16 1.14
600 315.6 1.16 1.20 1.22
650 343.3 1.18 1.23 1.23
700 371.1 1.21 1.28 1.25
750 398.9 1.54 1.32 1.28
800 426.7 1.85 1.33 1.32
850 454.4 2.30 1.38 1.34
900 482.2 3.08 1.56 1.37
950 510.0 4.44 2.15 1.39
1000 537.8 8.00 3.17 1.45
The TMF can be calculated for other temperatures and other materials.
TMF = or =
The Code Allowable stress is at the pipe temperature in psi or N/mm 2.
Corrosion Allowance Correction Factor
The corrosion allowance correction factor, CAF, is used to adjust the equivalent moment, EM, for
a corrosion allowance other than 1.27mm. A corrosion allowance of 1.27mm was used to
determine the MOMENT CAPACITY in the HORIZONTAL TRUNNION table. This is the
corrosion allowance from the specification for the pipe.
CA = Corrosion allowance of pipe, mm
CAF = Corrosion allowance correction factor
T = Original minimum pipe wall thickness, in (7/8 of nominal wall thickness)
CORROSION ALLOWANCE CORRECTION FACTOR (CAF)
Size Std Corrosion Allowance - mm

Wall
mm 0 1.27 2.5 3 6
3 5.49 0.63 1.00 1.90 2.74 -
4 6.02 0.66 1.00 1.74 2.34 -
6 7.11 0.71 1.00 1.53 1.91 -
8 8.18 0.75 1.00 1.42 1.69 11.47
10 9.27 0.77 1.00 1.35 1.55 5.83
12 9.53 0.78 1.00 1.33 1.52 5.25
14 9.53 0.78 1.00 1.33 1.52 5.25
16 9.53 0.78 1.00 1.33 1.52 5.25
18 9.53 0.78 1.00 1.33 1.52 5.25
20 9.53 0.78 1.00 1.33 1.52 5.25
24 9.53 0.78 1.00 1.33 1.52 5.25
MOMENT CAPACITY OF ONE TRUNNION (Kn-m)
PIPE PIPE
SIZE SCH. 2” 3” 4” 6” 8” 10”
3” 40 0.565
80 1.130
160 1.469*
4” 40 0.565 1.356
80 1.130 2.599
120 1.469* 4.067*
160 1.469* 4.519*
6” 40 1.469 2.486
80 3.277 5.423
120 4.519* 8.474*
8” 20 1.130 1.808 3.954
30 1.356 2.147 4.745
40 1.695 2.825 6.214
60 2.599 4.293 9.265
80 3.728* 6.101 13.219
100 4.519* 8.022* 17.513*
10” 20 1.017 1.582 3.503 5.875
30 1.243 2.373 5.084 8.587
40 1.921 3.164 6.892 11.750
60 3.277 5.423 11.750 19.998
80 4.406* 7.231* 15.592 26.551
100 4.519* 8.700* 21.354* 36.155*
12” 20 1.469 3.164 5.423 8.474
30 2.486 5.310 9.039 14.010
40 3.503 7.683 12.880 20.111
XS 4.971 10.847 18.417 28.585
60 6.101 13.106 22.258 34.573
80 8.474* 18.304* 30.958 48.019
100 8.700* 24.857* 42.934* 66.774
MOMENT CAPACITY OF ONE TRUNNION (Kn-m)
PIPE PIPE
SIZE SCH. 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 14"
14" 10 1.469 3.051 5.197 8.022 11.411

20 2.147 4.632 7.796 12.089 17.061
30 2.938 6.327 10.734 16.722 23.501
40 3.841 8.248 14.010 21.806 30.732
XS 4.745 10.395 17.513 27.229 38.302
60 6.327 13.671 23.275 36.155 50.843
80 8.700* 20.111* 34.008 52.877 74.344
16" 10 2.825 4.858 7.570 10.621 12.767
20 4.293 7.231 11.298 15.931 19.207
30 5.988 10.056 15.592 22.032 26.551
40 9.717 16.383 25.422 35.816 43.160
60 15.140 25.648 39.771 56.040 67.452
80 22.597* 38.415* 59.543 83.835 101.008
MOMENT CAPACITY OF ONE TRUNNION (KN-m)
PIPE PIPE
SIZE SCH. 6” 8” 10” 12” 14" 16” 18” 20”
18” 10 2.712 4.632 7.118 10.056 12.089 15.818

20 4.067 6.892 10.734 15.027 18.078 23.614
STD 5.649 9.491 14.688 20.789 24.970 32.653
30 7.344 12.428 19.207 27.003 32.653 42.595
XS 9.152 15.479 24.066 33.782 40.675 53.216
40 11.073 18.755 29.150 41.013 49.374 64.514
60 17.739* 29.941 46.550 65.531 79.089 103.155
20” 10 4.293 6.779 9.491 11.411 14.914 18.981
20 9.039 14.010 19.659 23.727 30.958 39.206
30 14.688 22.823 32.088 38.641 50.504 63.836
40 19.433 30.167 42.482 51.182 66.887 84.739
60 32.314 50.165 70.616 85.078 111.177 140.779
24” 10 3.954 6.214 8.700 10.508 13.671 17.287 21.354
20 8.248 12.767 17.965 21.693 28.246 35.816 44.177
XS 13.445 20.789 29.263 35.251 46.098 58.300 71.971
30 16.270 25.196 35.477 42.821 55.927 70.729 87.337
40 22.597 35.025 49.261 59.430 77.621 98.184 121.233
GENERAL NOTES:
1. All pipe and trunnion sizes are given in nominal pipe diameters.
2. All trunnions in the Table are standard schedule pipe.
3. The moment capacities are for lines having a corrosion allowance of

1.27mm (0.05 inches).
4. For line sizes 2" and smaller, clamps should be used.
5. No trunnions in the table have reinforcing pads.
6. The use of reinforcing pads on trunnions should be avoided. Very often this can be
accomplished by using two (2) trunnions instead of one (1).
7. In cases where reinforcing pads are absolutely required, they can be calculated by using
the formulas in Subject 13.30.8.
8. When the equivalent moment, EM, approaches a value with an asterisk (*),check the
trunnion stress.
9. The MOMENT CAPACITY for a pipe wall thickness not listed can be found using the
following formula.
13.27.2.0 BASE SUPPORT TRUNNIONS
GENERAL NOTES
1. Base support trunnions are vertical trunnions from the pipe to grade or to support steel.
2. The following items should be considered when selecting a base support:
a. The minimum trunnion diameter should be at least 1/2 of the line size for
appearance reasons.
b. Base supports welded to thin wall pipe should be looked at very carefully to
assure that there will be no undercutting of the pipe when the base support is
welded to it.
C. Compatibility of welding carbon steel to alloy lines, especially when the line is
operating at a high temperature.
d. Any specific job requirements.
3. In general base supports will not require reinforcing pads.
4. In most cases base supports should not be anchored. Some exceptions to this rule are:
a. Lines that are in a vibrating or pulsating service.
b. A base support that is being used as an anchor.
C. One side of small light weight control valve stations or small in-line pumps should
be anchored to keep the piping physically in place.
d. A base support that is supporting a vertical line to atmosphere, such as a vent line.
A base support trunnion is anchored when a "drilled base plate" is specified and is free to
slide when an "undrilled base plate " is specified.
5. Allow low one inch from the bottom of a base support trunnion to
grade for grout or to support steel for a shim.
6.0 TRUNNION SUPPORTS ON PLATFORMS
Piping Mechanical standard practice is to identify the trunnion during the plant layout phase of a
project. If the design load on the platform is greater than the allowable, it is also specified. The
point of support elevation (bottom of base plate) is set 1" above the top of platform (typically 2"
above top of platform steel). In any case, the extent and details of platform modification is
defined by the responsible engineering technology (typically C/S or Vessel Mechanical), and not
left to the field.
6.1 Tower Platforms

Vessel Mechanical prefers that all lines except small utility lines be supported independent of
platforms/platform support steel. This can sometimes cause interference or even unacceptable
aesthetic problems. When such problems occur, support from the platform or platform steel
should be discussed with the Vessel Mechanical work group leader. If such a support is needed
Vessel Mechanical will define the requirements for modifications of platform steel, grating and
kick plate on their drawings.
6.2 Civil/Structural Platforms

Civil/Structural will review the design loads and determine the need for additional steel and if the
grating can take the load. If it cannot they will identify the cutout and kick plate requirements.
7.0 ADJUSTABLE TRUNNIONS

7.1 Adjustable trunnions should be used as the preferred method of base type supports. They
have limitations and should only be used within those limitations.
7.2 Adjustable trunnions are not meant to take the place of adjustable supports (6580 and
6581) at rotating equipment and should not be used for this purpose. However, they may be used
in conjunction with an adjustable support if needed.
7.3 They should be used for support of vertical loads up to the limits noted below:
BASE PLATE VERTICAL LOAD HORIZONTAL LOAD

200 x 200mm 20000N 4450N
250 x 250mm 22250N 4450N
300 x 300mm 24475N 4450N
7.4 The shop will tack weld the trunnion to locate the adjustable trunnion base plate at the
POS specified on the isometric. The field will grind off the tack weld and adjust the trunnion to the
appropriate elevation and re-weld it per specification P26-2TS-XXXX. Field instructions
concerning removing the tack weld and re-welding the trunnion should be added to the IPS.
7.5 Adjustable trunnion POS elevations shall be as follows:
7.5.1 Grade Applications

The specified POS elevation at grade applications should be set at high point of paving, such as
30m. The field will then be able to adjust the base plate from POS 29.8m to 30.02m. Adjustable
trunnions to grade will not be grouted unless there is potential for standing water or paving slope
is such that non-uniform load bearing is anticipated, in both cases judgement is left to field
personnel. However, base springs (6340) and adjustable supports (6580 and 6581) will still be
grouted at grade applications.
7.5.2 Foundation and Embedded Plate Applications

The specified POS for locations where foundations are called for should be 25mm above top of
foundation. This will allow upward adjustment of over 25mm which will allow a total of 50mm + for
pouring tolerance. The need for grout at these locations is left to the judgement of field
personnel.
The specified POS for installations where an embedded plate has been specified should assume
that the plate is installed at the correct elevation, errors, if any will be compensated with the
adjustment.
7.5.3 Steel and Platform Applications

The specified POS should, as a standard, be set 50mm above TOS which will allow for 25mm
thick grating and 25mm of fabrication tolerances at platform locations.
8.0 ROUND BASE PLATES

Round base plates have been introduced as a safety issue and should be used wherever the
plates are elevated and the corners could be a safety hazard. Examples are a base trunnion
used with a spring or adjustable support, elevating the base plate to shin height and exposing the
corners. The same problem would not occur if a concrete foundation was used, as it would not
expose the corners. Any technical requirements for a square base plate governs the design.
13.27.2.1 DESIGN METHOD USING TABLES
The design of base support trunnions can be done using the theory for pipe attachments given in
Section 13.30.8 or by using the table for HORIZONTAL TRUNNIONS in Section 13.31.1.
1. Trunnion Base Support on Horizontal Pipe
The equivalent moment, EM, must be less than or equal to the "MOMENT CAPACITY" given in
the table for HORIZONTAL TRUNNIONS.
The equivalent moment, EM, must be

less than or equal to the “MOMENT
CAPACITY” given in the table for
HORIZONTAL TRUNNIONS Sec.
13.31.1.
2 L
P r
1
Pa
CAF corrosion allowance correction factor (See formula).
EM equivalent moment at pipe, Kn-m.
L moment arm from bottom of pipe,elevation to point of support elevation, m.
P total load on trunnion due to any concurrent sources, KN.
r outside radius of trunnion, m.
TMF - temperature & material correction factor.(See table).
subscript a in the vertical direction radial to pipe.
subscript c in the horizontal direction perpendicular to pipe.
subscript 1 in the horizontal direction parallel to pipe.
2. Trunnion Base Support on Elbow
The equivalent moment, EM, must be less than or equal to the "MOMENT CAPACITY" given
in the table for HORIZONTAL TRUNNIONS.
The equivalent moment, EM, must be

less than or equal to the “MOMENT
CAPACITY” given in the table for
HORIZONTAL TRUNNIONS in
Sec 13.31.1.
L
2
P r
1
Pa
L = moment arm from centerline elevation of horizontal pipe to point of support elevation, m.
subscript a - in the vertical direction.
subscript c - in the horizontal direction perpendicular to plane of the elbow.
subscript l - in the horizontal direction parallel to plane of the elbow. Other variables are as
defined previously.
3. EL Type Trunnion Base Support
The equivalent moment, EM, must be less than or equal to the "MOMENT CAPACITY"
given in the table for HORIZONTAL TRUNNIONS.
The equivalent moment, EM, must be less

than or equal to the “MOMENT CAPACITY”
L1 given in the table for HORIZONTAL
TRUNNIONS in Sec. 13.31.1.
L
2
2
P r
1
Pa
L1 - moment arm from edge of pipe to the centerline of the vertical trunnion leg,
m.
L2 - moment arm from centerline elevation of horizontal trunnion leg to -point of support
elevation, m.
subscript a - in the vertical direction.
subscript c - in the horizontal direction perpendicular to plane of the elbow.
subscript l - in the horizontal direction parallel to plane of the elbow.
The other variables are as defined previously.

13.27.2.2 CHECK FOR COLUMN BUCKLING
Column buckling is seldom a problem with vertical trunnions (base supports on

horizontal pipe, on elbows and of the EL type); however, they can be checked for
buckling quickly by using the following equation:
P' = El/L2
P’- total allowable vertical load, - N.
E - modulus of elasticity of trunnion, - N/mm2 (Use the temperature of the pipe or ambient temperature,
which ever is higher).
I - movement of inertia of trunnion, mm4.
L - vertical length of trunnion, - mm (for EL type based support L = L2).

The sum of all concurrent vertical loads must be less than P’.
13.27.3.0 TRUNNION DESIGN FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE LINES
13.27.3.1 SOURCE OF STRESS

For pipes operating at high temperature, a trunnion can be overstressed around the weld
junction. This high local stress is caused by the high temperature gradient at the connection. The
L
following
C figure shows the location of high thermal gradient stress.
Pipe Area of high thermal gradient stress

Trunnion shape at operating condition
Trunnion shape at ambient condition

CL Trunnion
13.27.3.2 Maximum Allowable Temperature of the Run Pipe
Instead of a detailed calculation, Figures 1, 2, and 3 can be used to quickly determine the
maximum allowable temperature (up to 1000 oF) of the run pipe so that the attached trunnion will
not be overstressed due to high thermal gradient at the junction. For temperatures above 1000 oF
or other applications not covered by the figures, consult the chief Engineer for the method of
analysis.
Each figure has two scales for actual trunnion outside diameter. One scale is for uninsulated
trunnions and the other scale is for fully insulated trunnions. For a given set of D and t values the
temperature obtained from the figure is the maximum allowable operating temperature of the run
pipe.
13.27.3.3 Trunnion Insulation Arrangement
For an uninsulated trunnion, the run pipe insulation should cover the trunnion around the
junction. For an insulated trunnion, the run pipe insulation should cover the entire trunnion, and
the trunnion insulation material and thickness should be the same as those used on the run pipe.
These arrangements are shown in Fig. 4. A shoe is required for fully insulated trunnions. For an
insulated base trunnion, the insulation should terminate at the trunnion base plate.
13.27.3.4 EXAMPLES
Example 1. A 10" schedule 30 uninsulated low carbon steel trunnion welded to a pipe. What
is the maximum allowable operating temperature of the carrier pipe so that the
trunnion will not be overstressed?
Answer: From Fig. 1, with D = 10.75" and t = .307" the maximum allowable operating
temperature of the carrier pipe is about 685 OF.
Example 2. A fully insulated 36" standard schedule stainless steel trunnion is welded to a
pipe which operates at 700OF.Will the trunnion operate safely?
Answer: From Fig. 3 with D = 36" and t = .375" the maximum allowable operating
temperature of the carrier pipe is 750OF. Therefore the trunnion will operate
safely.
The bending stress at the junction caused by other loads should also be checked per
SECTION 13.31.1 (Horizontal trunnions).
FIG. 1.
18
17
ACTU
AL
TRU 16
NNI
ON
OUT
15
SIDE
DIA
MET
ER 14
(INC
HES
) 13
650OF
12
700OF
11 750OF
10
800OF
850OF
9
76 5 900OF
950OF
60.8 4 1000OF
FULLY
INSULATED
TRUNNION .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0
UNINSULATED NOMINAL TRUNNION WALL THICKNESS (INCHES)

TRUNNION FIG. 1. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OPERATING TEMPERATURE FOR LOW CARBON STEEL PIPES
EMBED Word.Picture.8 FIG. 2.

18
17
ACT
UAL
TRU
NNIO
N 650OF
DIAM
ETER 700OF
INCH
ES 750OF
800OF
850OF
900OF
950OF
1000OF
FULLY
INSULATED
TRU
NNI
ON
FIG. 3.
.1
EMBED.2Word.Picture.8
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0
NOMINAL TRUNNION WALL THICKNESS (INCHES)

10FIG. 2. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OPERATING TEMPERATURE FOR LOW AND INTERMEDIATE ALLOY STEEL PIPES
8
A
C
T
U
7
A
L
T
R 650OF
81 6
U
N 700OF
NI
O
67.5 5 750OF
N
O
U 800OF
T
54 4
SI
D
E 850OF
DI
40.5 3
A
M
E
T
27 2
E
R
FULLY
(I
INSULATED 900OF
N
TRUNNION 950OF
13.5 1
C 1000OF
H
E
UNINSULAT
S)
ED
TRUNNION
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0
NOMINAL TRUNNION WALL THICKNESS (INCHES)

FIG. 3. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OPERATING TEMPERATURE FOR STAINLESS STEEL.
Pipe
FIGURE 4 : TRUNNION INSULATION C L
ARRANGEMENTS
TRUNNIONS WELDED TO
HIGH TEMPERATURE PIPES
C L Trunnion
Uninsulated
Trunnion
Pipe
C L
TRUNNION AND RUN PIPE

HAVE THE SAME INSULATION
MATERIAL AND THICKNESS
C L Trunnion
Fully Insulated Trunnion

13.28 Cold Supports
13.28.1 The cold support type to be used depends on the minimum design temperature for
the system considered. For temperatures down to –50 OC, supports in ITCS (impact
tested carbon steel) will be used. For lower temperatures, stainless steel supports
maybe required, with an insulating block fitted to prevent embrittlement of the
supporting structure. For full cryogenic systems, typically operating @ -160 OC to –
190OC, special supports are required, incorporating insulating resin or wood blocks
in combination with vapour barriers.
Some systems require acoustic insulation, in combination with cryogenic insulation.
A list of typical supports types is shown on the next page

Table 1 - Cold Support Types
Below are listed typical MWKL cold supports for various duties.
Not all Trunnions types have been listed. However trunnions will be made of the same material
as the pipe and as such will be suitable for the design temperatures assigned for the pipe.
Support Description Temperature Material

No Range oc
CS1 Cold Insulated Standard Pipe Clamped Supports with Shoes -190 to 50 * PUF cradles/steel
CS2 Cold Insulated Variable Pipe Clamped Supports with Shoes -190 to 50 * PUF cradles/steel
CS3 Cold Insulated Pipe Support Clamp without Shoes -190 to 50 * PUF cradles/steel
CS4 Cold Insul/Accous. Standard Pipe Clamped Supports with Shoes -190 to 50 * PUF cradles/steel
CS5 Cold Insul/Accous. Variable Pipe Clamped Supports with Shoes -190 to 50 * PUF cradles/steel
CS6 Cold Insul/Accous. Variable Pipe Clamped Supports without Shoes -190 to 50 * PUF cradles/steel
CS7 Cold Insulated Pipe Supports Vertical Run Pipe Guide From Steel -190 to 50 * PUF cradles/steel
Column
CS8 Cold Insulated Pipe Supports Vertical Run Pipe Guide From Steel Beam -190 to 50 * PUF cradles/steel
CS9 Cold Insulated Pipe Supports Hanger Rod Assemblies -190 to 50 * Carbon Steel
CS10 Cold Insulated Pipe Supports 2 Bolt Clamp -190 to 50 * Carbon Steel
CS11 Cold Insulated Pipe Supports Standard 2-Bolt Pipe Clamp -190 to 50 * Carbon Steel
CV1 Bracket For Cold Insulated Pipes Supported From ITCS Vessels To -46 ITCS
CV2 Bracket For Cold Insulated Pipes Supported From SS Vessels To –175 SS
(Upset Condition)
CV3 Cold Insulated Pipe Supports Guide Bracket on Vessels Low Temp. To –46 ITCS
(Upset Condition)
CV4 Pipe Support Guide Bracket For Stainless Steel Vessel To –175 SS
(Upset Condition)
CW1 Cold Insulated Pipe Supports Permali Block Details -175 to 50 “Permali” Block
CW2 Cold Insulated Pipe Supports For Trunnion Support And Stop -175 to 50 Permali” Block
+ metal clamp
CW3 Cold Insulated Pipe Base Support -175 to 50 “Permali” Block
CW4 Shoes For SS Uninsulated Lines 25 to 1050NB -175 Shoe as pipe Matl.+
(Upset Condition) “Permali” Block
CW5 Variable Height Shoes For SS Uninsulated Lines 25 to 1050 NB -175 As for CW4
(Upset Condition)
CW6 Shoes For SS Uninsulated Lines 1200 to 1800 NB -175 SS shoe +
(Upset Condition) CS bottom plate
“Permali” Block
S2 Shoe for Low Temp Lines -46 to 399 ITCS
S4 Variable Height and Length Shoe -46 to 399 ITCS
S5 Variable Height and Length Shoe For Low Temperatures -46 to 399 ITCS
SX3 Variable Height and Length Shoe For Low Temp Lines -46 to 399 ITCS
SX5 Variable Height and Length Shoe (Stainless Steel) -50 to 150 ITCS
SX7 Special Pipe Support Shoe For Thick Wall Carbon & Stainless Steel Pipe -46 to399 CS
UB1 Standard U Bolt -50 to 100 CS
UB2 Tico Clad U Bolt For Galvanised And Stainless Steel Lines -50 to 100 CS
VA1 Clamped Support For Vertical Stainless Steel Lines -46 to 150 SS
VU6 Heavy Duty 3 Bolt Clamp Acoustic -46 to 150 ITCS/ TICO HT
VU7 Light Duty 3 Bolt Clamp Acoustic -46 to 150 ITCS/ TICO HT
WP3 Clamped Wear Pad For SS and Galvanised Pipe -46 to 150 ITCS/ TICO HT
WP4 Clamped Wear Pad for ITCS Pipe Lines -46 to 399 ITCS
WP5 Wear Pad Clamp -46 to 150 ITCS/ TICO HT
WP5 Wear Pad Clamp -46 to 150 ITCS/ TICO HT
* Actual temperature range depends on insulation design. Figures given are typical extremes.
13.33.29.0 Slide Plates
13.33.1 Slide plates normally use PTFE sliding on a smooth stainless steel plate
and are used to reduce sliding friction at supports as required. Typically MWKL only
use PTFE slide plate systems for larger pipe lines >24” NB and cryogenically
insulated, in order to reduce the friction shear loads applied to cryogenic supports.
Sometimes PTFE pads are required in order to reduce pipe stresses.
The friction coefficient usually assumed for PTFE slide plates is 0.1 as opposed to
0.3 assumed for steel on steel. However this coefficient may be increased by the
presence of dirt between the slide plates (which will also damage the PTFE) , so
their use should be restricted to clean areas. In other less suitable locations
hangers could be considered depending whether vibration is present or if high side
loads exist.

2stress Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2stress Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M. W.

KELLOGG LIMITED PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS

TABLE OF CONTENTS AND REVISION HISTORY

SECTION TITLE PAGE

1.1.0 SCOPE AND APPLICATION

1.2.0 ASSOCIATED INSTRUCTIONS AND DESIGN GUIDES

Section 11 Initial Information Required for a Project

Section 13.26 Pipe Supports.

Section 13.0 Piping Stress Critical Line List

Sections 13.1 Design Guide for Equipment and Nozzle Loadings.

Section 6 Engineering Check of Drawings, Specifications, Schedules &

Section 7 Control of Computer Programs

1.3.1 Lead Stress Engineer

1.3.2 Critical Line List

1.4.0 GENERAL PHILOSOPHY

2.0 GENERAL WORKING METHODS

2.1.0 Initial Review

2.2.0 Detailed Stress Review

2.3 Final Approval

Final approval is sequenced as an operation within the Phase 2 (Detailed Design)

2.3.4 Pipe Support Study Drawings.

3.0 ENGINEERING DELIVERABLES

Documentation for Category 1, 2 and 3 systems

d) Equipment Loading Data / Vessels

e) Computer Printout : Completed title page describing outline of

Documentation for Category 4 systems

4.0 SPECIFIC WORKING METHODS

4.1 Thermal Loads and Stress Considerations

4.1.1 Elastic Modulus

4.1.2 Flexibility Temperatures

The temperatures to be considered in thermal analysis are:

b) Normal Operating Temperature.

Generally this temperature is not considered unless adjacent pipe or equipment

Steam tracing temperature should be used for flexibility calculations if it is greater

i) Internally Lined Pipe.

Where there is seen to be a differential temperature around the circumference of a

Temperature differentials should be obtained from the process engineers, but as a

4.2 Sustained Loads and Stress Considerations

4.2.5 Vacuum Design

4.2.6 Operating Weight

4.2.7 Occasional Weight

4.3 Dynamic and Other Loads and Stress Considerations

4.3.3 Wind : See Section 13.21 for load calculations

F = 2 x ρ x A x V2 / g (in consistent units)

maintenance / alignment reasons supports local to rotating equipment should be

Typical minimum friction coefficients:

Steel to Steel = 0.3

Project specifications may require higher values.

4.3.10 Vessels, Columns and Drums

4.4 Load Combinations

4.4.1 Load Summary:

Loads and stresses Caused by expansion due to:

1h) Pipe Bowing

Let 1x) = Maximum of 1a), 1c), 1e)

Sustained Loads and Stresses due to:

2a) Design Pressure

Dynamic and Other Loads and Stresses:

4.4.2 Equipment Loads (see section 13.1)

4.4.3 Pipe Stress

Stress combinations to be considered acting on equipment Nozzles.

4.5 Rotating Equipment

4.6 Air Cooled Heat Exchangers (Air Fans)